JP2019187757A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve preferable control or performance of a game in a game machine comprising a small winning expansion jackpot.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 500 executes a small winning game followed by opening of a big winning hole 20 when a result of win/loss determination is a small winning, and when the game balls entered the big winning hole 20 in the small winning game pass a specific area, the Pachinko game machine executes a special game. A sub substrate of the Pachinko game machine 500 may execute a performance for notifying a player of occurrence of the small winning once or more times, in a period since finish of the special game until a normal game is started, when the game balls pass the specific area in the small winning game and prior determination information sent from a main substrate 200 indicates that, one or more lottery value becoming a small winning is held.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area in which game balls are launched.

  Conventionally, among the various ball game machines, a so-called first type pachinko game machine is used while changing a plurality of symbols in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided substantially at the center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as “symbol change” or “change display”). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called so-called big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than a normal game when the combination of symbols when a plurality of rows of symbol variations are stopped becomes a specific aspect. Known as a thing. The variable display of symbols in the display area is not limited to simply displaying multiple symbols in a variable manner, but the time required for the variable display to be a big hit if one more symbols are aligned, such as the so-called reach screen. For example, an effect is made to increase the player's expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectation is enhanced by the use of characters in images such as symbols to give a story to the variable display and the notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation of transition to special games. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, there has been a recognition of the need for model development that is not tied to types in order to further improve game playability, for example, pachinko machines that mix multiple game machines of the same type or mix different types of game machines. Is also being developed. In addition, when a small hit is made, the game is passed to a specific area (V zone) in the variable pitching device and the game ball is promoted from “small hit” to “big hit”. A gaming machine that generates a game (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit development jackpot” or “small hit V”) has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2003-230714 A JP 2010-29308 A

  In order to increase the number of balls in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit development big hit, it is necessary for the game ball to pass through a specific area at the time of a small hit, resulting in a gameability different from that of a general gaming machine. The present inventor considered that a game control or performance different from the conventional game is necessary in order to increase the interest of the game in the gaming machine equipped with the small hit development big hit.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and has as its main object to realize suitable control or production of a game in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit development jackpot.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, a ball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention includes a game board in which a game area is formed, a first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and a predetermined position in the game area. And a second start port having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state, and entering the first start port For determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the first lottery value acquired by using the first lottery value or the second lottery value acquired by entering the second starting port. A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol, a first lottery value and a second lottery value, with a predetermined number as an upper limit, a hold control means for holding until the variation display start of the symbol corresponding to the success / failure determination, and a game area A game ball that is provided at a predetermined position and is opened according to the result of the determination. If a winning game that gives the player an opportunity to give a profit to the player and a symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a small win is stopped, a small winning game with the opening of the big winning game is executed. When a small-hit game control means and a symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big win is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered into the big winning opening during the small-hit game is further provided therein. If it passes through a specific area, it is in a state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games with opening of a big prize opening, and an effect display in which an effect is displayed When there is a device, an effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and a ball entering the second starting port, a variable display of a symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the ball as an opportunity is displayed. Whether or not it starts immediately When the result when the determination of success / failure based on the lottery value acquired with the entry is made is a small hit, the pre-determined information indicating that the change corresponding to the input is a small hit is decided to produce Pre-determining means capable of notifying the means. The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses, and the effect determining means receives a big win during the small hit game. When the game ball that has entered the mouth has passed a specific area, and the prior determination information indicates that one or more lottery values for a small hit are held, the special game ends and the game Until the game is started, an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit can be executed one or more times.

  It should be noted that any combination of the above-described constituent elements, or the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention may be mutually replaced between methods, apparatuses, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. This is effective as an embodiment of the present invention.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize suitable game control or performance in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit development big hit.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the back side of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows typically a success / failure determination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. It is a figure which shows typically the prior success determination table referred by prior advance determination. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the outline of a portable cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a main board | substrate and a sub board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of an effect display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process of the main board | substrate in a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 13 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process of the sub board | substrate in a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 16 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process at the time of receiving a command from a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process when the timer interruption for production | presentation display control generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process when a sub CPU receives a command from display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process when the timer interruption for various device control generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special symbol fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the main game flows of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the jackpot in the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows multiple types of fluctuation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of a starting port unit. It is a right view of a starting port unit. It is sectional drawing of a starting port unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance effect in the normal time. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance effect | production in a time-short game. It is a figure which shows the basic structure in the front side of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the structure of a special winning opening schematically. It is a figure which shows schematically the internal structure of a big prize opening. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation in a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the example of production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect following FIG.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed simultaneously. In order to achieve both of these game characteristics, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game is more likely to be a big hit with certainty, and the number of unit games constituting the special game when the second game is a big win (the opening time of the big prize opening is larger). A long long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game. Even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game. On top of that, aiming at the first hit in the first game first, after being given a short time in the big hit in the first game, the second game is repeatedly aimed at repeatedly gaining a lot of play Realize.

  FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The game machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 to a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

  The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right of the upper portion of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds corresponding to the game state and effects are output by means for controlling the effects. Most of the resin members constituting the exterior of the door 104 are translucent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the gaming state or the effect by means of controlling the effect, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  The game board 80 has a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on the game area 81 defined by the rails 82. , An out port 34, an effect display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over substantially the center of the game area 81 and the upper part and the right part thereof. 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed below the center decoration 64, and the direction of falling from the stage 65 depends on the direction of rolling and the direction of entering the first start port 11 and the first start port 11. It is distributed to the direction of the side that does not enter the ball. On the upper part of the center decoration 64, there is provided a movable accessory 66 that is driven in accordance with the contents of the effect and performs an effect operation. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as a game nail and a windmill (not shown) for forming a flow path of game balls are installed. In this specification, “entering ball”, “winning”, and “recession” may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning entrance and each entrance may be configured with a “passing entrance” (also called “gate” or “through-chucker”) of a type through which game balls pass. “Winning”, “Recession” and “Passing” may also be synonymous.

  The first start port 11 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second start port 12 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second game. The first start port 11 and the second start port 12 are configured to be able to aim at entering one ball by the strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first start port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81, and the second start port 12 is provided directly below the first start port 11. When hitting left, that is, when hitting relatively weakly so as to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 or it is easy to enter, while on the right In other words, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible to enter the second start port 12 or easy to enter, but not to the first start port 11. In addition, a flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that it is difficult to enter the ball. However, at the normal time, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of game balls is prevented, so that the second starting port is not opened unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. 12 is impossible to enter or difficult to enter. The lottery determination is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed whenever there is a ball entering the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. The

  In addition, the 1st starting port 11 and the 2nd starting port 12 may be provided in the position away from each other to the extent that it is possible to make a target for either one by the strength of the game ball. The first start port 11 and the second start port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aimed at one to enter the other. For example, the first start port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter or easily enter when left-handed, that is, when it is launched relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball or to enter the ball easily when it is launched to the right, that is, when it is launched relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64.

  The first start port 11 includes a first start winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 11 and generates first start winning information indicating the winning at the time of entering. The second start opening 12 includes a second start winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 12 and generates second start winning information that indicates that the ball has been entered.

  The first operation port 31 is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first working port 31 and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operation port 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second working port 32 and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passing of the game ball to the first working port 31 or the second working port 32 triggers an open lottery that determines whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32, a normal symbol that is a symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called “ordinary symbol lottery”. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the normal symbol change display stops. When the ordinary symbol stops at the winning symbol, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric agent solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operation ports may be one and provided at the left side position of the game area 81.

  Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detecting device 38 for detecting the entering of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the winning at the time of winning.

  The special winning opening 20 includes a special winning detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a special winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the special winning opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening winning information indicating the winning at the time of winning. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened as a “big hit” when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big prize opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34. As a modification, another prize winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the winning prize opening 20, and a plurality of prize winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the lowermost central portion of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided. A specification may be provided in which a plurality of out detection devices 39 are arranged side by side while ensuring a sufficiently wide gaming ball passage to prevent the clogging of the out port 34.

  A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, a general symbol, Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like is provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are juxtaposed side by side at the lower left position, so that the first special symbol is displayed. The change of 51 and the 2nd special symbol 52 is displayed.

  The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / losing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / losing lottery when the game ball enters the second starting port 12, and the special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. As a big hit. The 1st special symbol display part 41 and the 2nd special symbol display part 42 are 8 segment LED which consists of 8 segments, for example, 7 segments which form "8 character", and 1 segment which represents "dot" Display device. In the 8-segment LED, a numerical value for 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters and numbers, and may be symbols that are generally meaningless formed by a combination of segments. . These symbols are switched one after another at a high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, “-”) and non-display (for example, all off). By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbols 51 and second types are combined depending on their lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

  In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are used. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a technique that expresses the special symbols themselves without using decorative symbols by displaying them, the special symbols are displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. A configuration may be adopted.

  Above the first special symbol display unit 41, a first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is provided as a special symbol fluctuation holding lamp corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided. A second special figure hold display section 72 is provided as a special symbol change hold lamp corresponding to the game. The first special figure hold display section 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the lottery values held in the first game depending on the number of lighting or blinking thereof (hereinafter, the number of the lottery values held) Simply referred to as “hold count”). The number of holds in the first special figure hold display section 71 is the number of times (number) that the lottery value is acquired based on winning to the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of winning balls that have not yet been subjected to symbol variation. The second special figure hold display section 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holds in the second game according to the number of lighting or blinking. The number of holds in the second special figure hold display section 72 is the number of times (number) that the lottery value is acquired based on winning to the second starting port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of winning balls that have not yet been subjected to symbol variation. The number of hold of the lottery value is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of on-hold lamp images.

  A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. The normal symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps for the sake of convenience, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by their lighting combination. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time. Finally, the normal symbol is stopped by the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, when the first lamp is turned on and the second lamp is turned off, a disengagement stop pattern is expressed, and when the first lamp is turned off and the second lamp is turned on, the first hit mode is expressed. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

  Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a general symbol hold display portion 75 is provided as a hold symbol for normal symbol fluctuation. The general figure hold display section 75 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of normal symbol fluctuations depending on the number of lights or blinks. The number of normal symbol fluctuations held is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32 during the normal symbol variation, and the number of normal symbol lotteries for which the normal symbol variation has not yet been executed. Indicates.

  The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that performs display corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state described later, and includes, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, when the probability is changing, the lamp is turned on, flashed when entering easily, blinked when being in the normal state, and turned off when in the normal state. The number of unit games (round number) executed in the special game is displayed. The abnormality notifying unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. In addition, these display units may not be collectively arranged on the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be configured individually, or may be configured by dividing into a plurality of display devices appropriately combined. In addition, notification of a gaming state such as a specific gaming state may be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from a power failure.

  In the approximate center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and a decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is displayed. The change of the effect image including is displayed. Hereinafter, such display is referred to as “design variation” or “variation display”.

  The effect display device 60 is a display device that is configured by a liquid crystal display that displays the decorative symbol 61 in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the lottery determination result display indicated by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image that fluctuates a plurality of rows of symbols simulating a game of a slot machine as a decorative symbol 61 in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols composed of numbers “0” to “9” are displayed and varied in three columns, and hit or miss is indicated by three symbol combinations that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, characters, or symbols that are decorated with colors or patterns, but the symbols or symbols that are common to all symbols for these numbers, characters, and symbols. You may comprise in the form which adds a different pattern for every and integrates them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn may be used. The decorative design 61 is switched according to the development of the effect between the case where the design including the design is variably displayed and the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, characters and symbols are variably displayed. It may be a configuration. In the background of the variation display of the decoration symbol 61, a moving image having a staging effect related to the theme of decoration or production set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the symbol variation.

  The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix display device, but the width of the display area may be about half of the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass, and if the player strikes with the maximum strength as a so-called “right-handed”, the right passage The game ball can be passed through to the left, and so-called “left-handed” can be distinguished. The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In a plurality of cases, a display having a different size such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined. The sub liquid crystal may be disposed at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a launch handle. May be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball tray, right decoration lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be constituted by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be constituted by a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type or a display means such as an LED matrix type. .

  The effect button 109 is an operation input unit that is pressed by the player in order to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect, and the content of the effect is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can protrude. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as the lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

  An outline of a game method and a control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be described. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle are guided to the rail 82 one by one and launched into the game area 81. . When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the game ball is repeatedly fired at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 falls in a direction according to how it hits while hitting a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64 and the like. When a game ball is dropped into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the winning ball corresponding to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball tray 105 or lower It is paid out to the ball tray 106. A game ball dropped into each winning hole such as the general winning hole 33 is processed as a safe ball, and a game ball dropped into the out hole 34 is processed as an out ball. Specification that safe ball discharge is excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or safe ball is guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided, and all discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. It is good. Or it is good also as a specification which does not detect the safe ball | bowl by the guidance | induction of the safe ball | bowl, and the out detection apparatus 39, and makes the sum total which added the detection ball | bowl number of the safe ball | bowl to the detection ball | bowl number of discharge spheres.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the first working port 31 or the second working port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the stop mode of the stopped symbol and the gaming state at the time of stop display. . That is, when the game state at the time of symbol stop is the normal game state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit state, the short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the release of the ordinary electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, easy entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit state in the normal state and in the specific game state (for example, easy entry state). When the stop display is made, the long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long release are set to be different depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol is won with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short release in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first hit mode is selected) is 1/100 3. Execution probability of long release (probability of selecting a winning symbol in the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in a specific game state (for example, easy entry state), the normal symbol is won with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first win mode and the second win mode is not different from the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if winning is performed in any manner. In this way, in the easy entry state, the normal symbol hit probability fluctuation function (probability fluctuation from 1/100 to 99/100) and the open time extension function (open time when stopped in the first hit mode is 0. .1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. Note that the function (long open) for extending the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be referred to as “open extension”.

  In addition, as described above, in the normal state, the probability of long open is higher than the probability of short open, so that when a normal symbol is won, long open is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state. . As a modification, in the normal state, on the contrary, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification of both may be the same, or the specification of always being short opening Good. Further, in the easy-to-enter state, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced by using three functions including a function for shortening the normal symbol variation time. In this case, the variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state, and 2 seconds in the easy entry state. In addition, it is good also as a specification which can expand the normal electric accessory 90 only when the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state is set to zero (0/100) and the open lottery is made in the easy entry state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded, this may be notified in advance, the normal symbol variation suspension may be pre-read and notified before the normal symbol variation starts, You may alert | report during a fluctuation | variation.

  As a modified example of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second start port 12 is opened long, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds longer than that for the short opening 3 times. It is good also as an aspect. Further, a plurality of combinations of opening times and opening times may be prepared and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of releasing 2 seconds 3 times, the total opening time is the same as in the case of releasing 6 seconds once, but the former is longer than the latter when including the interval period. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball, assuming that the player who noticed the opening has adjusted the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that time. It can be said that the opportunity is long. Moreover, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of normal symbol hit types, and the opening mechanism of the spreading mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, in the normal state, 0.1 seconds is released once, in the easy entry state, the one second release is three times, and when the second hit is in the normal state Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy entry state.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. And the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which a variation mode from the variation start to the stop is determined. The decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variation effect pattern in which a variation mode from the start to the end of the variation is determined. A plurality of types of variation patterns and variation production patterns are prepared, and each has various variation times. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, a variation display time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. Stopped. Hereinafter, while exemplifying the variation display of the decorative design 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the method for determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

  As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, the symbol is varied in all three columns like the reel rotation of the slot machine at the start of variation, and the final stop mode is achieved by stopping one column at a time when approaching the variation end timing. The symbol combination as is displayed. In addition, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of columns at the same time instead of one column at a time, and an effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed during the variation display. You may enable it to display a design fluctuation. Further, as an operation at the time of starting the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the variation start of some columns in accordance with the subsequent development in the variation (such as the type of effect pattern) so as to produce a sense of expectation. It may be.

  Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variation effect pattern includes a normal loss effect pattern, a reach failure effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal off effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying a normal off symbol combination. The reach out effect pattern is an effect pattern for displaying an out symbol combination through a reach state, which is a big win if one more symbols are arranged. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a jackpot symbol combination through the reach state. In particular, patterns that have a long and short variation time are included as patterns when going through the reach state. Reach patterns with a relatively short variation time are called "normal reach", and reach patterns with a long variation time are called "super reach". ". The normal loss effect pattern, the reach failure effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern include a normal pattern that is displayed in a normal state and a time-shortening pattern that is displayed in a time-short state. However, even in the normal state, if there is a second symbol variation corresponding to the entrance to the second starting port 12, there is a probability that the big hit is likely to have a probable change or the number of unit games of the special game increases. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entrance to the 1 start opening 11, a chance effect pattern for displaying that it is a chance to generate a relatively advantageous big hit may be used. In the embodiment, the time reduction pattern is used in the time reduction state, but the time reduction pattern is used even in the probability variation state because the time variation is accompanied in the probability variation state. However, in the modified example, a specification using a pattern for probability variation different from that for time reduction in the probability variation state may be used. Alternatively, a specification using a common pattern may be used for the time reduction and for the probability change, or a specification for using the pattern for the probability change in the probability change state without using the time reduction pattern in particular.

  In addition, when the number of pending lottery holds becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened from the normal time in order to increase game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as “shortening variation”). Similarly, when the number of pending lottery holds is 4, in order to further increase the game efficiency, the symbol variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than in the case of the above 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “super shortened variation”). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stop are in a stop mode showing a big hit through the symbol variation described above, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 indicating the big hit is, for example, a combination mode in which three types of symbols match.

  There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a large difference in the profits of the winning balls. Usually, the special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demonstration time. After the start demonstration time screen is displayed, the special winning opening 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after nine or more game balls are dropped, the game is closed once. From such opening to closing of the big prize opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but it may be repeated a plurality of short-time opening during one unit game. After the opening / closing of the special prize opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 16 times, the special special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called an end demonstration time. In special games, it is possible to expect more than 9 balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called “out”) by 16 unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 16 unit games are repeated is also referred to as “16R jackpot” as appropriate, and a special game in which four unit games are repeated is also referred to as “4R jackpot” as appropriate. Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, in some of the unit games, the unit game is substantially repeated a few times by opening the grand prize opening 20 for a time shorter than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds). It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as “substantially nR big hit”) similar to the above.

  On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost none (such as 0.1 second), and the grand prize opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to complete the shortened special game. In a shortened special game, the opening of the grand prize opening 20 is repeated only twice for a very short time, so it is almost impossible to enter the big prize opening 20 and the special game is substantially equal to zero. is there. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also referred to as “2R jackpot” as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, it is also possible to realize a shortened special game by opening the big prize opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

  In addition, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of the stop are in a predetermined small hit state through the above-described symbol variation, the small hit game constituted by one unit game. Then, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to 2R big hit in appearance.

  When a special game occurs and the winning stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, “777”), probability change that is one of the specific games is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, the winning lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can be generated relatively early. It should be noted that the determination result of the winning / losing lottery may be a latent probability change state in which the specific big hit, that is, the big hit with probability change, is not clearly indicated on the appearance, and is not explicitly notified as a decorative symbol or production content. In this case, even if the probability change is in progress, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether it is a probability change or a non-probability change. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly indicated on the effect display device 60 whether the change is probable or non-probable.

  In the normal game after the end of the special game, the easy entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the open extension is executed so that the expansion time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is long open. Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is increased, the number of entering the second starting port 12 is likely to increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chance of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to keep playing with little or no increase in the number of balls.

  In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific gaming states, a so-called time reduction in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state is further executed. The variation times of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 are returned to the original variation time after a predetermined variation number, for example, 100 variations are displayed, but reach the variation number. If a big hit occurs before, the working hours are once ended. Since the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in a short time, compared to the normal state where the symbol variation is performed with the normal variation time, until the big hit occurs Time can be shortened, and the ease of winning a jackpot can be relatively enhanced. In a modification, it is good also as a specification which does not implement time shortening of a special symbol in an easy-to-enter state.

  FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as lottery when winning the first start port 11 and the second start port 12, in particular. The sub board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls display contents on the effect display device 60, and changes the display contents that are particularly effective according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for delivering prize balls. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the winning ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in accordance with winning in each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is configured by four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a 4-digit number for the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, functions realized by using each configuration will be described. In this specification, for example, the main configuration such as the main substrate 200, the dispensing control substrate 155, the launch control substrate 157, etc. In some cases, the terms are already used as they are for the sake of convenience.

  The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates power used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling award ball payout, a firing control board 157 for controlling the launch of a game ball to the game area, and control of the staging operations and processes The sub-board 300 as a sub-control device is configured to share functions.

  The main board 200 includes a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a large winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a general winning port group (a first general winning port 33a, a second general winning port). Port 33 b), out port 34, symbol display unit 120, and external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted to and received from each. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly sends the fire control board 157 by sending a fire permission signal to the fire control board 157 based on a prize ball payout sent from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like. And the payout of the prize ball by the payout device 154 is controlled. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching apparatus 156, and the ball feeding apparatus 164, and the ball feeding apparatus 164 and the launching are based on a launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to fire a game ball. The sub board 300 is electrically connected to the effect display device 60, the movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), and the decoration lamp 111. To transmit / receive various control signals to / from each other.

  Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub board 300 is performed in a single direction from the main board 200 to the sub board 300. Arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200. It cannot be requested. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main board 200 is transmitted. Bidirectional data transmission / reception is performed between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, the data transmission / reception in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155 or the one way from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 You may make it the structure set as data transmission / reception.

  In addition, each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below is merely an example, and as a modification, some functional blocks are placed on other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, or a part of the functional blocks may be configured such that the remaining part is mounted on the payout control board 155. May be provided divided into a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination unit 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation unit 202, a first lottery unit 211, a second lottery unit 212, a preliminary determination unit 235, a general drawing lottery unit 213, a hold control unit 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial process execution means 280, main power interruption process execution means 282, Main error detection means 284 and command communication means 205 are provided.

<Entrance determination unit 201>
The entry determination unit 201 determines whether or not a game ball has entered each winning opening. When receiving the first start winning information, the winning determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start port 11, and when receiving the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start port 12. to decide. The winning determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the big winning opening 20 when receiving the big winning opening information, and determines that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 33 when receiving the general winning information. When receiving the passage information, the entry determining unit 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the entry determining unit 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The entry determination unit 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays the calculated number on the performance display unit 159.

<Random number generator 202>
The random number generation unit 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery unit 211, the second lottery unit 212, and the ordinary drawing lottery unit 213. Specifically, the random number generation unit 202 uses “0” to “65535” as a random number (also referred to as “winning lottery value”) used in the lottery lottery performed by the first hit / failure determination unit 221 and the second hit / failure determination unit 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation unit 202 uses “0” to “255” as random numbers (also referred to as “symbol determination lottery values”) used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination unit 226 and the second symbol determination unit 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation unit 202 uses “0” to “255” as random numbers (also referred to as “variation pattern determination lottery values”) used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232. ”Is generated by a predetermined means. The random number generation unit 202 generates a random number in the range from “0” to “99” as a random number used in the success / failure lottery by the normal lottery unit 213 by a predetermined unit. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range from “0” to “2” by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. The “random number” here is a pseudo-random number such as a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, a random number using a 16-bit counter, or a software random number using a random number generation algorithm. But you can. Alternatively, a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number may be used. The random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be random numbers generated by the same generating means, or may be random numbers generated by different generating means. .

<Normal drawing lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32, the regular symbol lottery unit 213 generates a random number used for the lottery determination of the normal symbol and the random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. A lottery is executed after obtaining from 202. The normal symbol lottery means 213 determines a normal symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for normal symbol determination, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining a normal symbol stop symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. In the normal symbol success / failure determination table, the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol is determined, and in the normal symbol determination table, the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is respectively determined. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, whether the normal symbol is successful or not and the stop symbol are determined. The normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the normal symbol stop symbol with reference to the normal symbol determination table when the lottery value for the normal symbol winning lottery is true, and the normal symbol winning lottery value is determined. When it falls out, the mode of 1 out symbol is always determined. When the result of the normal symbol win / fail determination is true and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275 described later determines the stop symbol mode and the gaming state. Accordingly, the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the second start port 12 is expanded. The spreading time is 0.1 second when short opening and 6 seconds when long opening. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily held by the holding control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined hold upper limit number held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 functions as a function for executing the first lottery relating to the first game. The first lottery value acquiring means 216, the first winning / failure determining means 221, the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern determining. The means 231 is included, and the first winning / losing lottery is executed as the winning / nothing lottery corresponding to the entry into the first starting port 11. Based on the various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays the first special symbol 51 in the first special symbol display section 41 in a variable manner. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second win / fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entering the second starting port 12 The second winning / losing lottery is executed as the winning / losing lottery. Based on the various lottery results obtained by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 in the second special symbol display section 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition unit 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery unit 211 from the random number generation unit 202 in response to the ball entering the first start port 11. Specifically, a first winning / notifying lottery value for determining whether or not the first winning / failing determination means 221 is present, a first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and a first variation pattern The first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination unit 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation unit. The second lottery value acquisition unit 217 acquires, from the random number generation unit 202, random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery unit 212 when the second start port 12 is entered. Specifically, the second winning / notifying lottery value for determining whether or not the second winning / notifying unit 222 is determined, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop state of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining unit 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination unit 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation unit.

  The first winning / failing determining means 221 executes the determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determining means 222 executes a determination of whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. More specifically, in the determination of success / failure, “big hit” indicating a shift to a special game, “small hit” indicating a shift to a small hit game, and indicating that no shift is made to a special game or a small hit game “ It is determined whether it falls under “off”. The first success / failure determination unit 221 and the second success / failure determination unit 222 hold a success / failure determination table referred to in the determination of success / failure. In addition, in order to distinguish the success / failure determination to be performed when starting the symbol variation from the prior / failure determination described later, it is also referred to as “correction determination as the main determination” as appropriate. In the present specification, when “table” or “selection criterion” is used, the correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is defined in a table structure. In addition to referring to data, such a correspondence relationship widely includes a case where a program structure for deriving the second parameter from the first parameter is realized. Including these, as a concept substantially synonymous with “table”, it is appropriately referred to as “selection criterion”. In addition, when a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is substantially one type may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. Indicates the number of substantive types of tables, not the number of subdivided tables.

  The first success / failure determination unit 221 and the second success / failure determination unit 222 hold tables corresponding to the respective determinations of success / failure as reference determination tables to be referred to in the determination of success / failure. Specifically, whether or not to determine whether or not there is a correctness determination table (also referred to as a “first correctness determination table”) by the first appropriateness determination unit 221 and whether or not to determine whether or not the result is appropriate to determine whether or not to determine whether or not the second result is determined. A table to be referred to is selected according to the determination of validity. In the plurality of success / failure determination tables, determination results of big hits, small hits and misses, and winning / failing lottery values are associated with each other, and the success / failure probabilities are determined according to the associated jackpot range settings.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the success / failure determination table. The success / failure determination table in this figure associates determination results of big hits, small hits and misses, and winning / failing lottery values. Depending on the respective range settings, the hit / failure probabilities of big hits and small hits are determined. Is determined. As the main determination, the first determination unit 221 and the second determination unit 222 refer to the determination table in FIG. In both of the first winning / failing lottery performed by the first winning / failing determining means 221 and the second winning / notifying lottery performed by the second winning / failing determining means 222, a big hit is made only when the winning / losing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299 at normal times. At the time of certainty change, the range of the big hit is expanded, and not only when the success / failure lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when the lottery falls within the range of 300 to 2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, the single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the success / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and for probability change. It may be prepared separately for the 1-win / lotter lottery and the second-win / win lottery.

  In this embodiment, even if the winning / losing lottery value does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In the example of this figure, when the winning / losing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determining means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determining means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. In other words, the first hit / lotter lottery has a wider range corresponding to the jackpot than the second hit / lottery lottery, and the jackpot is likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it is all “out”, but in the example in this figure, the winning lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit out of the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit Is expressed as “displacement”. That is, when “whether” is considered from the viewpoint of “whether or not it is a big hit”, “small hit” may be included in the broad “out” in the sense of “not a big hit”. In addition, when “win / no-go” is viewed from the viewpoint of “whether or not”, “small hit” may be included in the broad “hit” together with “big hit”. In addition, although the example which implement | achieved the determination table of whether it is a big hit and the determination table of whether it is a small win in the figure in the form of a single winning / nothing determination table was shown in this figure, each may be implement | achieved as a separate table. Good. Further, the “small hit” may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding determination table.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol variation based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generation unit 202 and the result of the determination. . The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. More specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure by the first success / failure determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 is determined by the second success / failure determination means 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the determination results are held. The first success / failure determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table for big hits referenced at the time of big hit, a first symbol determination table for small hits referred to at the time of small hit, and a first symbol determination table at release when referred to when released. The second success / failure determination means 222 holds a big-hit second symbol determination table that is referred to at the time of big hit, a second-hit symbol determination table that is referred to at the time of small-hit, and a second-time symbol determination table that is referred to when it is off. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination performed when starting symbol fluctuation | variation from the prior symbol determination mentioned later, it is also called the "symbol determination as this determination" suitably.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 6A is a table that is referred to when the determination result is a big hit, FIG. 6B is a table that is referred to when the determination result is wrong, and FIG. This table is referred to when the determination result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this diagram in the symbol determination as the main determination. Each symbol determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the numbers “0” to “10” indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the big hit, small hit, and unsuccessful determination results, with “0” to “4” corresponding to the big hit, “5” to “9” corresponding to the big hit, “10” corresponds to a loss. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of symbols that are generally meaningless and formed by a combination of segments.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, special symbol types “0” to “4” are associated with the presence or absence of a probability change after the big hit and the big hit. Specifically, the type “0” indicates a 16R jackpot with certainty as a specific jackpot, and is associated with “0-99” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and “0” in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ". The type “1” indicates a 4R big hit (or “per real 4R”) with certainty as a specific big hit, and is associated with “100 to 149” in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and in the case of the second symbol lottery value. Corresponding to “145-149”. The type “2” indicates a 2R jackpot with certainty, and both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value are associated with “150 to 189” and the type “2”. The type “3” indicates a 16R big hit that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal big hit, and the type “3” is associated with “150 to 189” for both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value. The type “4” indicates a 4R big hit that does not involve a probability change as a normal big hit, and the type “4” is associated with “230 to 255” for both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value. As described above, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the contents of the jackpot and the subsequent presence / absence of probability fluctuation) is determined by the size of the symbol lottery value range.

  In addition, it is also possible to provide more special symbol types. In that case, it is configured so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types. It is possible to set a small number of types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more jackpot types corresponding to the increased symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one big hit type is determined so as to correspond to each of the special symbol type selected at the time of the first lottery and the special symbol type selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable that the first lottery and the second lottery are set so that the probability variation rate is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the type “10” is associated with the entire range of symbol lottery values in the case where the determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is always determined that the same special symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of detachment. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of detachment.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, special symbol types “5” to “9” are associated with small hits. The type “5” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “0-49”, and the type “6” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “50-99”. The type “7” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “100 to 149”, the type “8” is associated with the symbol lottery value range “150 to 199”, and the type “9” is the symbol lottery value range. Corresponding to “200 to 255”.

  In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 6 is also referred to as the preliminary symbol determination table in the preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate that the value of “0” to “10” indicating the type of the special symbol as the result of the prior symbol determination is the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. In addition, as a prior symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided and can be subjected to complicated determination, or a table that simplifies the determination range of jackpot symbols for executing similar special games may be used. . In addition, when symbols are uniformly determined at the time of detachment as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for detachment. You may decide.

<First Variation Pattern Determination Unit 231 and Second Variation Pattern Determination Unit 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 acquires from the random number generation unit 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses, as the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generating means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on a plurality of variation patterns based on this. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 each determine a variation pattern of the symbol variation with reference to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 perform prior pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determining means 231, the second variation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 are provided with a variation pattern table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, Each of the prior pattern determination tables used for generating information for determining the execution of the prefetch process at the time of entering the ball is held or shared. In the variation pattern, a variation time from a variation start to a stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and has various variation times depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern for which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, the variation display time is defined for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is displayed when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuations are stopped. It should be noted that the variation pattern determination executed when starting the symbol variation is also referred to as “variation pattern determination as the main determination” as appropriate in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to selection of a variation effect pattern of a decorative design, which will be described later, there may be a case where the variation pattern is defined as a different type with the same variation time.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of FIG. 9A in the normal state and refer to the table of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, if the result of the determination is not normal in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, “super 1” that is the super reach of the pattern range number “0” is selected, If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, “super 2” which is the super reach of the pattern range number “1” is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, “normal 1” which is the normal reach of the pattern range number “2” is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, “normal” which is the normal reach of the pattern range number “3” is selected. 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number “4” “no reach” is selected. As “out of reach”, a different variation pattern is selected depending on the number of holds, a change pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holds is 0 to 2, a change pattern of 7 seconds when the number of holds is 3, and the number of holds When is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

  In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to variation time will be described. However, a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each variation pattern in the sub-substrate 300, and several tens of variation effect patterns are formed as a whole. Is equivalent to the lottery value range of each classification.

  The range of pattern lottery values assigned to “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “Reach without reach” also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of holdings is 0, 1 as shown in (a) of this figure, the lottery value range of “Normal 1” and “Normal 2” becomes narrower as the number of holdings increases, and the lottery value of “no reach” The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected increases. Thus, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern is different for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control that makes it easy to select a variation pattern with a long variation time when the number of reservations decreases.

  In the normal state, when the result of the determination is 4R big hit or 16R big hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, “Super 1” which is the super reach of the pattern range number “5” is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, “super 2” which is the super reach of the pattern range number “6” is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, “normal 1” which is the normal reach of the pattern range number “7” is selected, and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, “normal” which is the normal reach of the pattern range number “8” is selected. 2 ”is selected.

  In the normal state, when the result of the determination is 2R big hit or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, “Super 3” which is the super reach of the pattern range number “9” is selected, and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, “normal 3” that is the normal reach of the pattern range number “10” is selected.

  When the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 transmit the predetermination result to the effect determination unit 303 as a so-called prefetching result, the pattern range number value (0 to 10) is set to the first determination result. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second win / fail lottery or the number of holdings. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, it is illustrated that there is a table for each success / failure determination result in the prior pattern determination. However, the random value is approximately equal to one using the prior pattern determination table regardless of the determination result. Only the information regarding which range is located may be derived, and the control unit side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled so as to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the prior determination result.

  In the variation pattern table of FIG. 7B referred to in the time reduction state, the pattern lottery values are allotted to the variation patterns for the time reduction. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as that in FIG. “Reach without reach reduction” is a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reach without reach” in FIG. “Reach without reach reduction” also selects a different fluctuation pattern depending on the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the holding number is 0 or 1, and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the holding number is 2 to 4. Are selected. The first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed in preference to the first lottery, the second lottery is in spite of the easy entry state due to the short time. The situation in which the second lottery hold is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. For this reason, in the out-of-range fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time fluctuation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holds is referred. It is good as well.

<Hold control unit 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes special figure hold means 241 and general figure hold means 242. The special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first success / failure lottery value or the second success / failure lottery value acquired before the first success / failure lottery value or the second success / failure lottery value. Is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / losing lottery value or the second winning / losing lottery value is suspended, and the corresponding winning / losing lottery value is stored until the corresponding symbol variation display starts. Here, for each of the first special symbols, the upper limit is 4 pieces, the first winning / losing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored. The second winning / losing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The general map holding means 242 stores the general map lottery value acquired by the general map lottery means 213 as a holding ball. These numbers of holdings are represented by the number of lighting or blinking numbers of the first special figure hold display part 71, the second special figure hold display part 72, and the general figure hold display part 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

  The lottery value of the second winning / losing lottery held in the special figure holding means 241 is digested preferentially over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. For this reason, even if the lottery value for the big win is held as the first winning lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second winning lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the big winning lottery value of the first winning lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if there is a big hit hold as the first winning / losing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big hit holding is entered as the second winning / losing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes first special figure control means 251, second special figure control means 252, and universal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern determined in accordance with the determination result of the first winning / losing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special symbol control means 251 sets a new symbol variation start condition that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery completed before that has ended. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined in accordance with the determination result of the second winning / losing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special symbol control means 252 also sets a new symbol variation start condition that the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery performed before that ends.

  The 1st special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the 1st success / failure lottery when the special lottery means 241 stores the success / failure lottery value of the second success / failure lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the second winning / losing lottery regardless of whether or not the special winning / holding lottery value is stored by the special figure holding means 241. Thereby, when the lottery value is suspended in both the first winning / losing lottery and the second winning / losing lottery, the lottery value suspended in the second winning / losing lottery is preferentially read and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / losing lottery is not read until the number of holdings in the second winning / losing lottery becomes zero, and the symbol variation thereof does not start.

  The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and stopping the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the change stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub main). When transmitting the variation start command, the determination result or determination result determined as the main determination, a value indicating each of the stop symbol and the variation pattern, and a value indicating whether the first determination result determination lottery or the second determination result determination lottery It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the variation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation stop command. The effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). Thereby, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and interlocked. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the lottery determination result by the normal symbol lottery means 213 as a normal symbol variation display.

<Special drawing adjustment means 276>
The special figure adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the other variable display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 12 regardless of the order of the game balls having entered the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. The variable display of 52 is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entrance to the first start port 11. For example, when both the first winner / lottery value and the second winner / lottery value are held, the second winner / lottery value is always preferentially digested and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

  The special figure adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. Alternatively, the display may be selectively changed. For example, when a ball is entered in the order of the first start port 11, the first start port 11, and the second start port 12, the display is changed in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. Is done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning / failing lottery values. Which special symbol should be changed is determined in accordance with the order of entry of the game balls, that is, the hold order of the success / failure lottery values in the hold control means 240, so that the player can easily grasp the order of change visually.

  The special figure adjusting means 276 in another modified example may display the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / losing lottery value and the second winning / losing lottery value are held, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Which special symbol should be changed is simply switched alternately regardless of the order of entry of the game balls, so that the player can easily grasp the order of change.

  The special figure adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the other variable display when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hit state. In this case, the special symbol change display is not started while the special game is executed, so that the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The preliminary determination unit 235 includes a first lottery preliminary determination unit 236 and a second lottery preliminary determination unit 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information related to the change before the first special symbol control means 251 starts to change the first special symbol. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 are performed. Is used to determine information related to the change in advance before the second special symbol control means 252 starts to change the second special symbol.

  The first lottery pre-determination means 236 serves as a pre-determination determination table according to the first lottery means 211, such as a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-design symbol lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 determines a random number group to which the first winning / losing lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs, using the first pre-correction / lottery value determination table. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 determines a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs, using the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination unit 236 determines a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation unit 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as prior determination results, and information relating to the prior determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by a command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically illustrating a prior success / failure determination table referred to in prior advance / failure determination. The first lottery pre-determining means 236 (pre-presence determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-winning lottery value determination table in FIG. When “0” to “299” is set, a value “1” indicating that is set as a prior determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is “300 to 2999”, a value of “2” indicating that is set as the pre-winning determination result. When the winning / losing lottery value is “3000 to 56499”, a value of “3” indicating that is set as a result of the pre-winning determination. In a case where the winning / failing lottery value is “56500 to 65535”, a value of “4” indicating that is set as a result of the pre-winning determination. Next, referring to the first pre-design lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first design lottery value is “0 to 99”, a value of “0” indicating that is set as the pre-design symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is “100 to 149”, a value “1” indicating that is set as a prior symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is “150 to 189”, a value “2” indicating that is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is “190 to 229”, a value “3” indicating that is set as a prior symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is “230 to 255”, a value “4” indicating that is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to a first prior variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), when the first pattern lottery value is “0 to 9”, a value of “A” indicating that is set as a prior pattern determination result. . When the first pattern lottery value is “10 to 29”, the value “B” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is “30 to 255”, a value of “C” indicating that is set as a prior pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary success / failure determination regarding the first game) is transmitted to the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. Is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / losing lottery), information indicating the number of suspensions, and the like.

  The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success / failure determination regarding the second game) refers to the second preliminary determination lottery value determination table in FIG. When the value is “0 to 299”, a value of “1” indicating that is set as a pre-win / fail determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is “300 to 2999”, a value of “2” indicating that is set as the pre-winning determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is “3000 to 63999”, a value of “3” indicating that is set as a result of the prior winning / non-winning determination. In a case where the winning / failing lottery value is “6400 to 65535”, a value of “4” indicating that is set as a result of the pre-winning determination. Next, referring to the second pre-design lottery value determination table (not shown), when the second pre-design lottery value is “0 to 144”, a value of “0” indicating that is set as the pre-design symbol determination result. . When the second symbol lottery value is “145 to 149”, a value “1” indicating that is set as a prior symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is “150 to 189”, a value “2” indicating that is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is “190 to 229”, a value “3” indicating that is set as a prior symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is “230 to 255”, a value “4” indicating that is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to a second prior variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is “0 to 9”, a value of “A” indicating that is set as the prior pattern determination result. . When the second pattern lottery value is “10 to 29”, the value of “B” indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is “30 to 255”, a value of “C” indicating that is set as a prior pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination unit 237 (pre-probability determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later. Is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating that the player has entered the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / losing lottery), information indicating the number of pending tickets, and the like.

  In addition, various information temporarily stored as a preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of four pieces, respectively, similarly to the number of reserved memories. In addition, you may memorize | store a prior determination result using the pending | holding storage area which the pending | holding control means 240 memorize | stores. The information may be erased based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination unit 235 is transmitted to the effect determination unit 303 by the command communication unit 205 (sub-control command transmission unit 207) described later. In this way, it is possible to expect efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 by sharing with other areas or deleting information based on completion of transmission. In addition, the determination table for the main determination may be used as the determination table for the preliminary determination without providing the table for exclusive use of the preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second gaming machine, A part or all of the common pre-judgment table may be shared. In this way, the data capacity in the main board 200 can be expected to be reduced by sharing with other determination tables. Note that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination unit 235 can be selected as appropriate, for example, by transmitting only the determination result. Further, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition unit 216 and the second lottery value acquisition unit 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the above-described command communication unit 205 without being determined by the prior determination unit 235, and the sub-board The pre-determination content may be determined by 300.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control unit 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when the first winning / losing lottery by the first lottery unit 211 indicates a transition to the special game. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the special winning opening 20. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second special lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode It is determined that the special game operation condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the special winning opening 20.

  The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times, and is configured by a plurality of unit games. Special games include a 16R jackpot that repeats a unit game 16 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game four times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a unit game that has a shorter opening time than the 16R jackpot and 4R jackpot only twice. The 16R jackpot is a jackpot in the second winning / losing lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first winning / losing lottery. In the case of 16R jackpot and 4R jackpot, in principle, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In 2R big hit, the big prize opening 20 is opened only for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the number of rounds set for the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of 2R big hit, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the big winning opening 20 may be opened in the same opening manner as 16R big hit and 4R big hit.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small winning game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small win, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small winning game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275.

  In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the big prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the big prize opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big prize opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability changing state, the short time state, and the easy-to-enter state. The specific game control means 270 shifts the gaming state to the certain variation state, the short time state, and the easy entry state after the special game is completed when the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by the transition to probability variation. The probability variation state, the short time state, and the easy entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the short-time state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of holdings of the success / failure lottery value by the holding control unit 240 is referred to, and a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to appear as the number of holdings by the holding control unit 240 decreases. In the easy-to-enter state, both normal symbol change and the opening extension of the second starting port 12, or only the opening extension of the second starting port 12 is performed. In other words, the specific game control means 270 causes the second start port 12 to be in the open extended state when the specific big hit is achieved, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the success / failure lottery is the second successful / bad lottery. Transition to a higher probability state than the normal probability state. During the probability variation state, the probability of the success / failure determination result by the first success / failure determination means 221 and the second success / failure determination means 222 is maintained at a high value.

<Opening / closing control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the special winning opening 20 at the second start opening 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening / closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 at the second start port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second start port 12 in the short open or long open time according to the result of the open lottery, and in the easy entry state, the open control unit 275 opens the second open port in the long open time. 2 Open the start port 12. The ease of entering the ball at the second start port 12 is enhanced, so that the player can continue the game without reducing his possession. In the special game, the opening / closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the special prize opening solenoid 92 to open the special prize opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process execution means 280 executes a control start process for the main board 200 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off. The main power interruption processing execution means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power interruption process on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The main error detection means 284 performs an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start process, the abnormality handling process, and the abnormality detection process for the main board 200 will be described later.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication unit 205 transmits a control command necessary for execution of a payout to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control for transmitting a control command required for execution of the effect control to the sub-board 300. Command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command for instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the determination of the winning ball to each winning hole by the winning determining means 201, and the main board 200. Sends a command indicating the error status etc. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmission unit 207 transmits the lottery determination result corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determination unit 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

  The sub-control command transmission means 207 changes the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special graphic control means 252 start and stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a change stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the determination result or determination result determined as the main determination, a value indicating each of the stop symbol and the variation pattern, and a value indicating whether the first determination result determination lottery or the second determination result determination lottery It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the variation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation stop command. The effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). Thereby, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized and interlocked. Further, the sub control command transmission unit 207 transmits the result of prior determination by the prior determination unit 235 to the effect determination unit 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, a winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start port 11, second start) regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the number of reserved information, the gaming state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, for the sub-board 300 side, a so-called “look-ahead” process is realized in which, based on the received pre-determination result, the success / failure result can be presumably recognized in advance before the symbol variation start order is reached. Note that processing based on prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission unit 207 transmits information regarding the special game by the special game control unit 260, information regarding the small hit game by the small hit game control unit 265, and information on the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery unit to the sub board 300. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 such as information related to initial processing and information related to errors by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detection means 284, or transmitted to the main board 200. Information regarding various signals is transmitted to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes a pattern mode determining unit 301, a pattern storage unit 302, an effect determining unit 303, an effect control unit 304, a time measuring unit 307, an effect setting unit 308, a sub initial process execution unit 360, a sub power cut process execution unit 362, A sub-error detection unit 364, a command reception unit 370, and a sub-side prior determination unit 371 are provided.

  The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 in the variation of the decorative design 61 and the display process thereof are determined. In the effect pattern, a plurality of change effect patterns in which the change process from start to stop and a change process in the change display of the decorative design 61 and the change process are determined, and the expectation degree to the jackpot are displayed separately from the change display of the decorative design. And a plurality of notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the notice before the change display stops.

  The command receiving unit 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and the sub-side preliminary determination unit 371 holds the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a prefetch effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 displays the information on the effect display means 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / losing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / notifying lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. 108. The contents of the effect to be output to the decoration lamp 111 and the like are determined. The pre-reading effect determining means 374 determines the contents of effects to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the prior determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination unit 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination unit 231 or the second variation pattern determination unit 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication unit 205. Either one is selected and read from the pattern storage unit 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read information on the fluctuation effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining unit 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the variation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination unit 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication unit 205, and may vary along with the content of the prefetch effect by the prefetch effect determination unit 374. An effect pattern may be determined. The pre-reading effect determination unit 374 specifies the result of this determination more accurately based on the previous determination result from the command communication unit 205, the past determination result held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, etc. Based on the result, whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect before the main determination and the execution contents are determined. Specifically, the pre-reading effect determination unit 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the previous determination result received this time. It is determined whether or not to do. Based on the determination result, the result of the main determination relating to the previous determination result received this time, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. are specified, and whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed and the execution contents of the pre-reading effect are determined based on the specific result. . The effect determining means 303 is described as the effect determining means 303 that includes both the normal effect determining means 373 and the pre-reading effect determining means 374 in cooperation with each other.

  Each variation effect pattern has a variation time for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a change effect pattern of effect images having the same change time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

  The symbol form determining unit 301 determines the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 and the arrangement thereof, the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery unit 211 or the second lottery unit 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the decoration It is determined according to the design variation effect pattern. The symbol form determination unit 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control unit 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, when the determination result by the first determination unit 221 and the second determination unit 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R big hit or 16R big hit. A specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as “777” and “111” is selected. A specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as “357” is also selected when the result of the determination is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. When the determination result is neither big hit nor small hit, it is a combination in which three symbols such as “312” and “946” are not arranged, and a specific combination selected at the time of 2R big hit or small hit A combination that does not apply is selected. When the determination result is not 4R big hit or 16R big hit, and a variation pattern showing a loss with reach is selected, a combination where only one pattern is not complete, such as “191” or “727” Select.

  The decorative design variation effect pattern defines a decorative display variation display mode, that is, a production process from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of variation. In the variation effect pattern, a pattern for displaying a normal out symbol, a pattern for displaying a symbol out of reach after reaching a big win if one more symbols are aligned, and a jackpot symbol through a reach state are displayed. A pattern is included. In particular, the pattern that passes through the reach state includes patterns having various fluctuation times. Each variation effect pattern has a variation time for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a decoration effect variation effect pattern having the same variation time as that of the special symbol in accordance with the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  When the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination unit 231 or the second variation pattern determination unit 232 is a time-shortening pattern in the time-short state, the effect determination unit 303 uses the variation in which the time-saving effect content is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for the time reduction is an effect in which a background video or a sound that gives an impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to time reduction or certainty is output.

  The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern that temporarily displays an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif, an effect pattern that operates an accessory, or an effect pattern that outputs a specific sound. The effect based on the notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and suggests that the symbol variation is highly expected to stop in the big hit mode. For example, there are a normal notice effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group notice effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable, and a step-up notice effect that is set such that the greater the number of stages is, the higher the degree of expectation for the big hit is included.

  The notice effect pattern includes a pattern in which the effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state and a final stop mode of the symbol is notified (pre-reach notification), and the decorative symbol 61 is one. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously notices that the production is executed at the timing when it has not stopped and the reach state is reached.

  The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the success / failure lottery or the prior determination result by performing a predetermined notice lottery and display the effect. Determine the notice effect pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the determination result of the success / failure lottery or the pre-determination result. In this way, the correspondence relationship of whether or not to display the determination result of the lottery determination and the notice effect is determined. Thereby, the high expectation degree to the big hit can be suggested by displaying the notice effect itself.

  The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the effect image including the decorative design 61 in a variable manner according to the selected change effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 uses the reception of the variation start command for the decoration symbol 61 as a new decoration symbol variation display start condition. When the effect determining unit 303 determines that the notice effect is displayed, the effect control unit 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a manner to be superimposed on the symbol variation effect. Let

  The effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery when the winning / losing lottery value of the second winning / losing lottery is stored, and whether or not the winning / raising lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / losing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery values are held for both the first winner / lottery lottery and the second winner / lottery lottery, the lottery values held in the second winner / lottery lottery are preferentially read and the variation of the decorative design is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / losing lottery is not read until the number of holding of the second winning / losing lottery becomes 0, and the variation of the decorative design does not start. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

  The effect control unit 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control unit 304 includes an effect display control unit 305, an audio control unit 306, and a lamp control unit 309. The effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control unit 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

  During the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, the normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is displayed in a variably manner. However, in the form that hinders the visibility of the variable size display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, the main effect contents other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 are displayed. Special effects may be displayed. In this case, the player is notified that the symbol is changing by variably displaying an alternative symbol that is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal-sized decorative symbol, but when distinguishing it from an alternative symbol, the normal-sized decorative symbol is also referred to as a “normal decorative symbol”.

  The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is hindered, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is not displayed. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting the result of the determination of success or failure, and has a display form that is simplified (in other words, simplified or simplified) than the normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a more simplified variation process. The alternative symbol has a display form on the appearance corresponding to the part indicating the symbol type of the normal decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display format indicating numbers, characters, and symbols indicating the symbol type. In addition, the alternative symbol is variably displayed in a region narrower than the region in which the normal decorative symbol is variably displayed, and typically, at a position where the main effect by elements other than the symbol is difficult to be hindered, for example, at the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuation is displayed. The substitute symbol is displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be identified in appearance. The alternative design may be a reduced version of the normal decorative design, and may be the same as the normal decorative design except for the size.

  The plurality of alternative symbols displayed instead of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high expectation that the result of the success / failure lottery will be advantageous to the player by the combination of the stop mode at the end of the change. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols indicate that the expectation of jackpot in the fluctuation is high by reaching a reach state in which two symbol types out of three alternative symbols are aligned. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state become a specific type of symbol that suggests a relatively high expectation such as “3” or “7”, and the expectation such as “1” or “2” The level of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a kind of symbol that suggests a relatively low level. The substitute symbol does not enter a definitive stop state in appearance, but enters a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a state of fixed stop. Further, instead of displaying the normal decorative symbol and the alternative symbol exclusively, there may be overlapping display periods. Still further, during a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is hindered, the normal decorative symbol variation display may be continued and the alternative symbol variation may be displayed.

  The time measuring means 307 is a time measuring circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The time measuring means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit in which a battery is incorporated and the date and time can be continuously measured by the battery even when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered off or during a power failure may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be a slight difference in the time of each gaming machine due to individual differences and time deviations. Is unlikely to occur.

  The effect determining unit 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring unit 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the variation period of the symbol variation and the gaming state. The synchronized production period lasts for several minutes, and its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The production pattern of the synchronized production is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the reproduction of the predetermined music and video is defined for the production pattern. A plurality of types of production patterns of synchronized production are prepared, and different types of production patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

  The synchronized production is executed regardless of whether the game is a normal game or a special game. Here, “during normal game” includes display of a so-called standby demonstration screen. In other words, during “normal game”, (1) “variable display normal game” in which symbols are variably displayed, and (2) “variable stop normal game” in which neither the symbol variability display nor the standby demonstration screen is displayed. ”, (3)“ Standby demo screen displaying normal game ”which is not displaying the symbol variation display but displaying the standby demo screen. The tuning effect can be executed during any period of (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the luminance reduction in the tuning effect is (1). Can be different. In addition, during the standby demonstration screen display, information related to the mobile cooperative system described later can be input by the player operating the effect button 109 and the cross key 110, and when there is an operation input, the video and audio of the synchronized effect are output. Suppressed, priority is given to screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperative system.

  The synchronized effect is an effect in which, for example, a performance or video of a predetermined music is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronized effect start time”). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance may be a time that reaches the pachinko gaming machine 100 with a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, or every hour or half hour on the basis of the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as “every hour”, not at a fixed interval, but one hour after the first, and three hours after the next. The interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by a game store clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same tuning effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that takes the time to reach a predetermined time interval from the time of turning on the power, a plurality of machines are turned on simultaneously at the amusement store. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronized performance is executed simultaneously on the plurality of game machines. As a result, production is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized with multiple units, and the same music and video flow at the same time, so that live performances and movies are shown on the spot, and there is a realistic synergy A production effect is obtained.

  The function of the synchronized production is similarly built in another game machine of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are turned on simultaneously by the game shop clerk every day. The plurality of game machines that are simultaneously turned on will almost simultaneously reach the synchronized production start time, and the synchronized production can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronized effect. In that case, not only the display of video is synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music will be synchronized with multiple units. Rise.

  The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a game result history and a production result history. The game result history is a result of a game that leads to a game that a player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of winning balls, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, and the number of times reduced. The history of performance results is different from game profits, and is recorded on the effects recorded to acquire profits such as the right to change the content and type of the effects and the right to easily appear certain types of effects. It is information such as scores. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini-game, etc. and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score and game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the player's portable terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. Note that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, reaching 100 points, etc.) As a result, the number of items that can be customized increases.

  The effect setting means 308 stores a setting for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect contents as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, as an effect pattern to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns with different displayed motifs, characters and music are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect is to be displayed. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as designs of the designs included in the decorative design to be changed, and the player is allowed to select which of these designs is to be displayed. In these cases, when the player performs an operation on the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demonstration screen is displayed, and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 displays the selection contents. Remember. The effect determining unit 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting unit 308.

  The sub initial process execution means 360 executes a control start process of the sub board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off. The sub power-off process execution means 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power-supply abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub error detection unit 364 executes an abnormality detection process on the sub substrate 300. When the sub error detection unit 364 detects power-off, the sub-power-off processing execution unit 362 backs up the RAM data to the backup RAM as the power-off processing.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperative system, the player registers in advance by setting an account and password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 encoding the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358 on the screen of the effect display device 60, The player is made to read it with the camera of the portable terminal to access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (which is also referred to as “password information”) obtained by encoding the player identification information and the performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display control means 305 to display the password information input screen, and allows the player to input via the button operation of the cross key 110 or the like. The effect setting means 308 decrypts the input password information and registers it as player identification information and effect score history, so that the game content and effect score state of the player up to the previous time can be taken over. The input of the password information becomes an instruction to start recording of the player's game history and an instruction to start production customization for selecting various production elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game or production progresses, the score set by the production setting means 308 is added to the player as a production profit, and accumulated as production score history. Can customize the production at any time and select and set the favorite elements as various production elements. The point assignment for the production is based on the addition for each symbol variation, and the higher the kind of the production with the higher expectation level for the transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher score is also given when the transition is made to the special game.

  As the effect customization, the player uses a part of the cumulatively obtained score, and the color, background, shape, character, and the like constituting the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60 according to the number of points used. Production elements such as music can be changed to a desired type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction element change instruction through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements in accordance with the instruction. For the production elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the required number of points for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of items that can be customized increases, or a chance to increase the number of items that can be customized is given. When the player performs a button operation as an instruction to end the game or production customization, the production setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on the production, production score history, and the like. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. The information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as the benefits on the performance and the performance score history are transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means for displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350 and managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and production can be taken over in the next game. Further, by continuing the game for a long time, points can be obtained as the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of effects increase.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling overall gaming operations. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The entrance signal from each entrance and the payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning opening solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, a command necessary for effect control is transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the lottery determination, the determination result of the symbol, and the determination result of the variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

  The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte structure by combining 1-byte instruction type data called so-called MODE data and 1-byte instruction content data called so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data to the sub-board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance for each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the contents of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the instruction type data. When the bit is 0, it indicates instruction content data.

  Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification for transmitting 1 byte of data for each data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 2 bytes per byte in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. . The MODE data that is the upper byte is transmitted in the first communication, and the EVENT data that is the lower byte is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 transmits the same data continuously, and when the same data is read twice by the sub board 300, the completion of the transmission / reception of the data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice, and transmits it up to five times.

  The sub board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data in which an effect process is defined and display pattern data in which an effect display process is defined. A sub control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 to the sub RAM 311, and effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives display devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. Controls the production of sound output, lamp lighting, and accessory operations. The sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to the effect control device 313. In the present embodiment, an example in which the sub board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described. May be formed as a separate substrate.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and sound data used for sound output in a compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for change display and effect display as an effect object indicating the determination result of the lottery determination, for example, a sprite image of a decorative symbol used for a decorative symbol change, a sprite image used for a notice effect, and various effects. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which an operation is defined when an effect operation is added to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

  Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, effect image data and motion data designated in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands related to effect display, effect image data, and motion data are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and display control is performed by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, a command and audio data relating to audio output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and audio output control is performed by the audio control circuit 314.

  The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, which are connected via the bus 330. The bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

  The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when the effect image data or motion data is decoded by the decoder 332, or used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 performs drawing processing or image processing. ).

  The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and uses the generated display image as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Stored in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM serving as a buffer memory that temporarily stores a frame of a moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

  The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the stored order. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. While the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image, Store in the memory area for another frame.

  The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” in which a display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as “schematic display pattern data” in which an outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the outline display pattern data defines a general flow of a series of effect display processes such as the start and stop timings of decoration symbol change, the playback order of a plurality of moving images, and the start and stop timings of playback. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control, such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative symbols, and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

  When the presentation control device 313 performs display control based on the “schematic display pattern data” sent from the sub CPU 310, the “detail display pattern data” necessary for the processing is read from the data ROM 324 and both display pattern data are used. Display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the production control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including “schematic display pattern data” and “detailed display pattern data”. Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the “schematic display pattern data” stored in the sub ROM 312 and the “detailed display pattern data” stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, but simply “display pattern data”. " For example, when the production control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes “schematic display pattern data” and “detailed display pattern data”. . In the modification, the display pattern data is not divided into “schematic display pattern data” and “detailed display pattern data”. Good.

  In the present embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326 is shown. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the presentation control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326. In this case, the processing that is executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be.

  In the present embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, a configuration in which an effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312 is shown. In the modified example, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also function as the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the processing executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. May be.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but hereinafter, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes hardware-related initial settings such as setting of internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

  Subsequently, the power-off recovery process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned ON and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power-off recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

  The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch. When the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), the main CPU 290 initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed at the time of the previous power interruption, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum because the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Data in the main RAM 291 is inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), a process for returning to the state before power-off is executed (S114).

  In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on normal data indicating that power-on is normally performed is stored in the power-off information flag, and various error initial settings and communication initial settings with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Next, the command request for untransmitted before power-off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the gaming state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second start opening 12 and the special winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power is turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol is executed.

  In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the main RAM 291 is initialized and the effect display is initialized.

  When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process to be described later, and an interrupt timer operation is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and an interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing gaming machines (S120).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily disables the timer interrupt (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected by a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power interruption memory is executed by inputting an unconditional interrupt request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the processing, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204). If the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 executes processing for power-off. Therefore, it progresses to S212. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N in S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol, Initial value random number update processing is executed (S208), timer interruption is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), an interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

  When power-off is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the content of the power-off information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not properly saved, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), the process proceeds to S222. When the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally stored, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, at the next power-on, in order to check the backed-up main RAM 291 data, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. Note that the above power-off process is executed by the main power-off process executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, interrupt operation conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage gaming machines, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , Second start port effective period setting process (S314), winning prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), special winning opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), incoming ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), gaming state display processing (S340), steering wheel status signal Inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, the next timer interruption is permitted (S356), and the process returns.

  In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame opening signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch status signal attached to the game board surface are monitored. The data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state includes level data (data at the input port at the current interrupt) and rising data or falling data (data at the input port at the current interrupt and data at the previous interrupt). The data indicating the switch in which the switching is seen by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR.

  In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and is stored by incrementing the value if the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and when the result obtained by subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and when the result is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

  In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. Each random number value, maximum value, and initial value are read from the main RAM 291 and the random number value is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the random number range is cycled. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

  In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the initial random number is set to 0. Similar processing is executed in the initial value random number update processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

  In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables. If the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer is not updated.

  In the second start port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second start port 12 is set. The second starting port 12 has a valid period during which a prize ball is paid out and a lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed by entering a game ball, and a prize ball is paid out and a second special ball is drawn even if a game ball enters. An invalid period during which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed is set. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), since the second start port winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, a game ball enters the second start port 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting port 11, the big winning port 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning port 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is “ordinary electric utility is in operation”, data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the effective period is stored in the second start port effective period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not “operating the normal electric accessory”, if the value of the second start opening effective extension timer is not 0, the second start opening 12 is in the effective period in the second start opening effective period flag. If the value of the second start port effective extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second start port is in an invalid period is stored in the second start port effective period flag.

  In the winning monitoring process (S316), the passing of the game ball is inspected, and when the game ball passes the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If there is, the winning counter is updated. It also requests creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and transmission of a command.

  In prize ball control processing (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 Are executed in order.

  In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32 by monitoring the passage of the game ball through the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32. In this case, if the number of retained normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of retained ordinary symbols is updated, and the random number related to the ordinary symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

  In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is being performed, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the status of the normal symbol is “Normal symbol changing”, the normal symbol changing process is executed. If the normal symbol status is “Normal symbol stopped”, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. If it is “operating in an accessory”, a process during operation of an ordinary electric accessory is executed, and if it is “under demonstration of an operation of an ordinary electric accessory”, a process during an end of demonstration of an ordinary electric accessory is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is judged that the normal symbol fluctuation time has ended, the normal symbol change stop setting is made and the normal symbol status is set to `` Normal Set to “Stopping symbols”. In the normal symbol stop symbol display processing, the normal symbol stop symbol display time is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol stop symbol display time has ended, the normal symbol operation end setting corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of winning, set the state of the normal symbol to “Normal Electric Tool Operating”, save the operating status of the normal electric tool open extension function when starting the normal electric character operation, and start the normal electric character operation The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of detachment, the normal symbol state is set to “normal symbol fluctuation waiting”. In the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, when the winning of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored and it is determined that the winning number of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum winning number Performs the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second start opening effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored. When the opening / closing of the entrance of the prize opening according to the above is performed and it is determined that the opening of the entrance of the series of ordinary electric accessories 90 has ended, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric actor 90 and the second start opening are valid Set the extension time. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not ended, the setting of opening / closing the entrance of the winning opening relating to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the normal electric actor operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory 90 operation end demo time has ended, the state of the normal symbol is changed to “normal symbol”. Set to "Waiting for change".

  In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored. If the normal symbol variation is on standby, and if the value of the number of the normal symbol operation holding balls is other than 0, the variation of the normal symbol Is determined to start. If it is determined that the normal symbol variation will be started, the normal symbol operation holding ball count is decremented, and the hit determination, determination of the stop symbol, setting of the variation symbol number of the normal symbol, and setting of the variation time of the normal symbol are executed. . Thereafter, the state of the normal symbol is set to “normal symbol changing”, and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal symbol state setting, hit determination, and variation pattern determination is cleared.

  In the starting port monitoring control process (S326), the first starting port 11 winning and the second starting port 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. When the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, when the winning of the game ball is confirmed, the internal random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired internal random number, It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in jackpot determination. In addition, a design random number and a variation pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special design. When the reservation of the second special symbol is digested in preference to the reservation of the first special symbol, only renewal of the hold related to the winning is executed, but when the special symbol reservation order is the winning order, In addition to updating the hold related to the winning, updating the total number of holds and storing the winning order is executed. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening prize, when checking the state of the gaming machine and determining that it is a command transmission period, per request notice effect, per symbol notice effect request, pattern notice The production requests are executed in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and storing the random number related to the first special symbol while the probability variation function of the normal symbol is not activated, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not activated, or (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit The command transmission period is determined. Next, an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special symbols is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls for special symbols has been updated. As described above, in prefetching, four pieces of advance determination information (pre-failure determination information, advance symbol determination information, advance pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted as a set to the sub-board 300. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process. However, in another example, when there is a ball entering the starting port, the transmission is uniformly performed and prefetching is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various situation determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Subsequently, when the value of the second start port effective period flag is inspected and the value of the second start port effective period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the effective period, the first start port winning prize is determined. As in the case, the second start opening winning monitoring process is executed. When the value of the second start port effective period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the invalid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is not executed. If the game ball winning is confirmed when the number of held balls is 0, the number of held balls is once changed from 0 to 1 and a control process related to the start of variation described later is executed. .

  In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected. If the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the special symbol status is inspected. If it is "Waiting for special symbol variation", the special symbol control general-purpose process is terminated. If it is "Start variation", the special symbol variation is completed. The start process is executed. If the special symbol is changing, the special symbol changing process is executed. If the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the effect display is started on the sub-board 300. Requests additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information commands, sets the special symbol state to “special symbol variation”, and clears the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern to zero. . In the special symbol fluctuation processing, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has ended, the special symbol change stop setting is made and the special symbol status is set to `` Special Set to “Stopping symbols”. In the special symbol stop symbol display processing, the special symbol stop symbol display time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol stop symbol display time is ended, the special symbol operation end setting corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big win, in order to terminate the operation of the special symbol, the special symbol state is set to “Waiting for special symbol variation”, the number of times that the special electric accessory is activated continuously is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. Fluctuation function, special symbol variation time shortening function, ordinary symbol probability variation function, ordinary symbol variation time shortening function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function are deactivated, and the state of the gaming machine is prepared to open the big prize opening Set to the middle, and execute a hit start demonstration display time setting, a hit start demonstration effect command request, and a launch position designation effect command request. When the result of the hit determination is a small hit, it judges whether the special symbol's fluctuation time reduction function and the normal symbol's probability fluctuation function have ended, updates the fluctuation pattern selection state, requests a game state command, and In order to end the operation, the special symbol state is set to “Special Symbol Fluctuation Waiting”, the gaming machine state is set to the small hit start demonstration, the hit start demonstration display time is set, and the hit start demonstration effect is set. A command request and a command request for a launch position designation effect are executed. If the result of the hit determination is out of place, the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function is judged to be completed, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to “special symbol variation waiting”, and a command request for a launch position designation effect is executed.

  In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, the special prize opening opening preparation process, the special electric accessory operating process, the special prize opening closing process, the big hit end demonstration process, the small hit start demonstration process, the small hit special electric charge A process during operation, a process during closing of a small winning big prize opening, and a process during a small hit end demonstration are executed.

  In the big prize opening validity period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of the validity period judgment of the big prize opening 20, when the value of the big prize opening validity time is 0, the big prize opening validity period flag is a big prize. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and when it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big prize opening validity period flag.

  In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored to determine whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the variation can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the preferential digestion of the second special symbol, (1) the jackpot or the jackpot is not being hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3 ) When the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) the special reserved symbol has a number other than 0, the special symbol can start to vary. Is determined. (5) In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls in the special symbol is other than 0, when the digestion order of the special symbols in the reserved ball is a winning order, (6) When the determination is consistent with the digestion order, that is, the winning order, it is determined that the special symbol can be started to change.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where the variation can be started, the number of reserved balls for operation of the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Thereby, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

  Next, a special symbol hit determination is executed. In the hit determination, a special symbol random number is used to determine whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and the determination result is stored in a special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is determined. In the symbol determination, if the winning judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the symbol random number per special symbol, and if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined. Is determined.

  If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined. Set the gaming state after the big hit, such as the operation of the variable time shortening function and the easy-to-win state for normal symbols. Subsequently, settings such as the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the content of the opening time of the big prize opening are executed. Subsequently, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting a variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit is completed based on the result of the hit determination and the operation state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Subsequently, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the gaming state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “change start”.

  If the hit judgment result is a small hit, select the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, set the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state, set the start demo time and end demo time, The area of the main RAM 291 used for determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “change start”. If the result of the hit determination is out of place, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to “change start”.

  In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the disconnection / short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door / frame opening signal, and the error state is changed. If there is, the error state is stored, and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the gaming machine. At this time, you may control the light emission mode of light emission means, such as LED mounted in the control board, according to an error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

  In the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the incoming ball passage time abnormality, and the continuous on time ( For example, if it is determined that the counter value incremented at each interruption when the switch is on is an abnormal value, the setting of the abnormal ball passing time, the command transmission request, and the security output to the external information output terminal 160 Create output requests in sequence. At this time, you may control the light emission mode of light emission means, such as LED mounted in the control board, according to a ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

  In the game state display process (S340), each display is required to request the display of the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of reserved balls for normal symbols, and the number of reserved balls for special symbols. Create data.

  In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected. If it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted. Update, setting of a handle state monitoring timer, and a command transmission request for handle state effect are executed. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, the setting of the handle state monitoring timer is executed. When the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

  In the LED output process (S344), a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, a special symbol operation hold ball number display, a normal symbol operation hold ball number display, a game state display, and a special electric accessory are continuously displayed. Display initialization, to display the number of times the actuator is operated, the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operating device is not operating, the display of the strike, the error, and the prize ball ratio The display data is acquired and output in order.

  In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of a game ball, setting of prohibition / permission of launch corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the launch prohibition / permission data, the launch prohibition / permission signal is output.

  In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port.

  In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the big prize opening solenoid 92, the acquisition of the output data of the ordinary electric combination solenoid 91 and the output data of the big prize opening solenoid 92 are obtained. Perform acquisition and output of output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and output data is output to the solenoid output port.

  In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence / absence of a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected. If it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data.

  In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

  The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. Random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per ordinary symbol and a random number per ordinary symbol as a random number related to a normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to a special symbol. There are soft random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, and random numbers of fluctuation patterns. In addition, the initial value random number for the normal symbol, the initial value for the special symbol, the initial value for the special symbol, the random number for giving the initial value of the random number for the normal symbol, the random number for the special symbol, and the soft random number for the special symbol. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

  The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of normal symbol fluctuations held when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. Is less than 4 which is the upper limit value, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the variation of the normal symbol is started.

  The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is stored in the normal symbol variation when the game ball passes the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. When the number is less than the upper limit of 4, the number is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the variation of the normal symbol is started.

  The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. The built-in random number and the value of the soft random number per special symbol are acquired and added to each other, and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

  The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed in the start port monitoring control process (S326) when the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. And is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

  The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 6), and is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). From the predetermined position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The symbol random number per special symbol is used to determine the big hit symbol when the hit determination is a big hit in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

  The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is a predetermined value stored in the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). It is acquired from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine a special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

  The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are values in the same range as the random number per ordinary symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. The initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process are updated and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per ordinary symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the special initial random number update processing (S308). When updating the soft random number per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

  Since the interrupt process is executed at regular intervals by timer interruption, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular intervals. The That is, the random number per ordinary symbol, the regular symbol variation pattern random number, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the design random number per special symbol, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, the main process (S120) is a period from the end of the interrupt process until the next timer interrupt is generated, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from a certain time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the gaming state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308). Unlike), it is not executed at regular intervals. Thereby, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing control start processing of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process execution unit 360. Hereinafter, the control start process will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process execution unit 360. When the control of the sub board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets the stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and sets the registers of the sub CPU 310 and initializes the ports. Initial setting related to hardware is executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and arranged in the sub RAM 311. Among various variables in the control program, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and zero-clear data is set for a variable without an initial value. Thus, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). The interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes processing at power-on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is effective as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority. Next, as a priority level 7 interrupt process with the highest execution priority, there is a command process received from the main board 200. Next, as a priority level 3 interrupt process with the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer There is a reset process at the time. The priority level 2 interrupt process to be prioritized includes a process related to a command transmitted / received to / from the control CPU 320. The priority level 1 interrupt process having the lowest priority level is a communication process with the real time clock. And various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, they are executed with priority from the highest priority preset for each interrupt type. Note that the processing shown in this figure includes the power-on processing that is the highest-priority level interrupt and reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing that is performed when CPU runaway is detected, which is a priority-level 3 interrupt. Including.

  Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information for all models stored in advance (S512). . All lamps such as the decoration lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to this flow, but when the process returns, the process shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 in FIG. 16 is correctly arranged in the main process of this figure, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530). All interrupts are permitted (S532), and an initialization operation for devices such as motors and solenoids is executed (S534).

  If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decoration symbol counter is updated so that the combination of the decoration symbol removal becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 Is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in a method for determining an out-of-decoration symbol using a counter, in the case of a method for determining an out-of-decoration symbol using a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations to be out-of-sequence. Does not execute the process of S540. The process of determining an out-of-decoration symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, notifies the error (S544), and executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). A preliminary lottery is executed (S548). Note that in the advance notice lottery in S548, a notice effect command that appears immediately after the start of symbol variation is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, so that the lottery process is not performed in a single loop but multiple times. Dividing into loops, the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol variation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command analysis is immediately after, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y in S554), if not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), the lottery soft random number is updated as a low-priority process that may be performed in the idle time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern of a special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decoration symbol is determined in the processing of S552. If the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is selected. If the method is used to determine the out-of-decoration symbol, the stop symbol of the ornament symbol is determined in the process of S552.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority after the reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is acquired for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. Thus, by acquiring a hard random number each time a main command is interrupted from the main board 200, the randomness of the value is increased without causing periodicity in the acquisition timing of the random number. If the data read in S600 does not coincide twice (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

  If the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command in S602 (N in S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data The command write pointer, which is the reading position in the ring buffer for), is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the process returns to the original routine.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620). If there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that the command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the control CPU 320 has normally received from the control CPU 320. After the transmission, the setting of the buffer read address is updated (S628), and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), the process returns to the original routine by skipping S624 and subsequent steps.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received from the control CPU 320 by the sub CPU 310 is a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for the lamp control of the decorative lamp 111, the solenoid and motor for driving the movable accessory 66, and the management control of various timers, and is generated at a cycle of 1 ms. Since priority level 1 is the lowest priority level interrupt, priority level 2 or higher interrupts are permitted (S640), a signal indicating input from the effect button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power interruption Then, input / output of a port for inputting / outputting a drive signal to / from a control target device such as a motor or a solenoid is processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power interruption is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Updates data related to device control, such as count processing based on control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on / off control of a buffer for writing data to the port in S642 (S644), and a timer for measuring the timing of presentation Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switch control of the decorative lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. Then, a 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

  The minimum unit for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and the integral multiple is set as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, so that the lamp control and the image display control can be easily synchronized. In addition, for example, when counting a relatively long period of time such as error notification for 30 seconds, if a count of one interrupt (1 ms) period is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms The count value can be shortened by setting the cycle count value.

  Task control includes 16 types of tasks 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring in a cycle of 8 ms is realized.

  The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is turned on and off for each frame. If the toggle signal does not change with the same value continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 The control CPU 320 transmits a reset signal to the control CPU 320 and receives the reset signal, and executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period such as an error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the timeout occurs.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation display process. If the second winning / failing lottery value is put on hold (Y in S700), the second winning / failing determining means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is winning (S702), and the second winning / failing value is determined. The determination unit 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination unit 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and a variation start command is issued together with the determined result. Transmission to the sub-board 300 starts the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

  If the second winning lottery value is not held (N in S700) and the first winning lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning / nothing lottery means 221 performs the first winning / nothing lottery. The value is read again to determine whether or not the first special symbol 51 is correct (S710), the first correctness determining unit 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining unit 231 is the first. The variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / losing lottery value is not held, the processing from S710 to S722 is skipped (N in S708).

  The symbol variation display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the symbol display stop timing is reached after a predetermined variation time has passed (N in S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time has elapsed. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a variation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300, and the symbol variation being displayed is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives the command indicating the change start and effect display contents from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, the variation pattern, and the determination result. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the sign setting is turned on by the pre-determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should avoid the superimposed display with the notice effect. If it is not (S758 N) and the symbol change is not triggered by the precursor setting turned on (N in S760), a setting to display a predetermined notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is If it is a symbol variation that is turned on (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). When the sign setting is not on (N in S756) or when the specific effect content is included in the variation effect pattern (Y in S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

  After that, the decorative effect change effect display is started (S766), the decorative effect change effect display process (S768), the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the change stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when the change stop command is received (Y in S772), the design change display is stopped by stopping the decorative design in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The decoration effect variation effect is terminated (S776).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special game process. First, the effect display control means 305 starts special game effect processing (S800), and the opening / closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening 20 has not reached nine or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( If the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but the number of balls entered into the big prize opening 20 has reached nine or more (Y in S806), the opening / closing control means 275 has a big prize opening. 20 is closed (S810).

  If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display The control means 305 terminates the special game effect processing (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the short time, the easy-to-enter state (S818). ).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the small hit game process. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the special winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N in S822). If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), the special prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if opening / closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of opening / closing and the process returns to S820. (S828) If the opening / closing for the set number of times has been completed (Y in S826), the small hit game is terminated.

  In the base technology, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the big hits in the first game, that is, the second game is one big hit than the first game. In other examples, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected winning ball value than the second game. However, the first game and the second game may be designed so that the expected prize-ball acquisition values are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in the second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game in which a unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50% may be executed. In any case, when a special area is provided in the special winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the special winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the end of the special game A specific game such as a probability change state may be implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the big game is won in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big game is won in the first game. The probability that the normal game in the probability variation state is executed after the end of the special game is high may be configured. For example, there is a first hit in which a special game that makes entering a specific area relatively difficult is executed and a second hit in which a special game that makes entering a specific area relatively easy is executed. It may be provided and the second game may be configured to have a higher probability of winning the second game than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning second in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of winning second in the second game may be 100%.

(First embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration described above. Hereinafter, differences from the base technology will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted. Of the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology will be described with the same reference numerals.

  In the following description, the process of displaying the effect image on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determining unit 303. However, as described above, the effect determining unit actually realized by the sub CPU 310 is described. 303 (sub-main) transmits a command related to the image of the effect to be displayed to the effect control unit 304 (sub-sub) realized by the control CPU 320, and the effect control unit 304 controls the display control circuit 326 to display the image of the effect. Is displayed on the effect display device 60. Therefore, in the following description, the operations described mainly with the effect determining means 303 may be expressed with the effect control means 304 or the display control circuit 346 as the main. In the following description, the configuration for displaying an image can be appropriately replaced with a configuration for outputting information indicated by the image by sound.

  The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, includes a plurality of start winning holes, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and a single big winning hole. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology, changes in the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter also referred to as “special diagram 2”) as the first special symbol 51 ( Hereinafter, it is executed with priority over the fluctuation of “Special Figure 1” (Special Figure 2 priority digestion). On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology in that it has a function of small hit V.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery is executed, and the determination result of the lottery is When it is a big hit, a special game in which the grand prize opening 20 is repeatedly opened is started. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery becomes a predetermined result called “small winning”, the small winning game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time is executed. This small hit game is distinguished from a big hit because it has only one unit game that is repeated multiple times in the case of a big hit.

  When a small hit game is being executed and a game ball that has entered the special winning opening enters a specific area called the V zone in the special winning opening, the special electric accessory is continuously operated to execute the big winning game. A special device is activated in which a condition device that activates the accessory continuous operation device is activated and promoted from a small hit to a big hit, and the big prize opening is opened for a long time. A so-called small hit V is generated. That is, the special game control means 260 is a specific area in the big prize opening 20 when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 20 during the small hit game. A special game is executed when passing through. For this reason, the small hit game in the first embodiment has substantially the same operation as the conventional second type pachinko game. As a difference between the model that uses small hit V and the second kind pachinko game, in small hit V, depending on the stop display mode of the special symbol (so-called one kind of hit) that triggered the small hit game The condition device that operates at the time of entering a specific area (continuous action device) can be made different, and the profit obtained by one V winning can be changed.

  When the special game ends, the game shifts to a specific game called a variable time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as “time saving”) with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). The short time is continued until a new jackpot occurs after the special game ends or the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number. The time saving in the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the second start winning opening is higher than the normal state, which corresponds to the easy entry state in the base technology, and is also called an electric chew support. The time reduction includes (1) special symbol variation time shortening, (2) normal symbol probability variation, (3) regular symbol variation time shortening, and (4) normal electric accessory 90 opening time extension. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is a pitch variation mechanism that can be released so that the game ball can enter the second start port 12 from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the winning lottery triggered by entering the second start port 12, the probability of determining a small hit is set high. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during a short time when the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is increased, and the possibility of generating a small hit V is also increased. The big hit that is a big hit compared with the small hit V and the special game is started when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the big hit is also referred to as a “design big hit”. In the normal game in the normal state (non-short-time state), since it is difficult to enter the second start port 12 except for the chance effect (normal symbol first hit) described later, first enter the first start port 11. Sphere, gain the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 and shift to a shorter time. Then, at the short time, the player can enter the second starting port 12 to obtain a small hit V or a symbol big hit, and after the special game is finished, the short time continues to aim for a continuation of the small hit V and the symbol big hit. It becomes.

  FIG. 26 shows a main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, in the normal time (in the normal game in the normal state), the player enters the first starting port 11 and aims to win the symbol big hit with the special figure 1. The symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 is a so-called initial hit, and includes 15R jackpots given 9 times, 4R jackpots given 9 times, and 4R jackpots given once. Any one of these types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of jackpot symbol.

  If 9 times are given, it means that after a special game is finished, the game moves to a normal game with a short time, and if the time is short hit (including both symbol big hit and small hit V), or normal game This means that the process ends when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in FIG. Also, once a short time is given, the game shifts to a normal game in a short time state after the special game ends, and if the short time state is a big hit, or the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal game is executed once. It means to end when it is done. In addition, the short-time end condition described here is described on the assumption that a preferable game is performed in order to obtain a ball in the design of the gaming machine, and the detailed end condition will be described later.

  In the case of a big hit that is given 9 times a short time, after the special game is over, the game is shifted to a normal game in a short time state, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed 9 times, and the change of the symbols for the 4 holds remaining at the end While (typically four fluctuations in FIG. 2) is executed, a rush effect is displayed. In addition, in the case of a big hit that is awarded once in a short time, the game is shifted to a normal game in a short time state after the end of the special game, and during the execution of the fluctuation of FIG. The chance effect is displayed while the symbol variation (typically, the four variations in FIG. 2) is executed. If a big hit does not occur due to the symbol variation during the short time and the symbol variation for the four reserved symbols, the normal time is restored.

  In the symbol fluctuation during the short time, or in the four symbol fluctuations after the completion of the time reduction, the small hit V (special figure 2 small hit V), the special figure triggered by the fact that the fluctuation result of the special figure 2 became the small hit Two symbol jackpots or special figure one symbol jackpots can occur. Special figure 2 small hit V is distributed to either 15R big hit with 9 times / hours, 10R big hit with 9 times / hours or 5R big hits with 9 times / hour. Special figure 2 design big hit is 5R big hit which is given 9 times. The special figure 1 symbol big hit is distributed to either 15R big hit that is given 9 times and 4R big hit that is given 9 times. When these big hits are completed, the game returns to the normal game (rush effect) in the short-time state, and aims to win the big hit again by the symbol fluctuation during the short-time or four symbol fluctuations after the short-time end.

  The pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment can open the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a long time in accordance with the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Then, the chance effect (general power release effect) is displayed during the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and also during the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 held during that time. The special effects that occur during the normal game in the normal state have a great chance of acquiring the small hit V, so that the special effects that differ in appearance from the special effects that are executed in the same state are shown in FIG. Is to execute. The special figure 2 small hit V, the special figure 2 symbol big hit, or the special figure 1 symbol big hit can also occur during the special figure 2 suspension.

  FIG. 27 shows a basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. The first start port 11 is at the lower center of the game area 81 and is provided below the center decoration 64. The first operation port 31 is provided at a position above the first start port 11. The first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 are capable of entering or facilitating entering a game ball that is launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words, left-handed). Provided in position. On the other hand, the second start port 12, the big prize opening 20, and the second operation port 32 are games that are fired at a strength different from the first strength (relatively strong strength in the first embodiment, in other words, right-handed). It is provided at a position where the ball can enter or can enter easily. In the first embodiment, the left-handed game ball does not enter the second start port 12, the big winning port 20, and the second operation port 32, and the right-handed game ball is connected to the first start port 11. A game nail and a windmill are arranged in the game area 81 so as not to enter the first operation port 31, and a flow path of the game ball is set.

  A special area in which a small hit development big hit is generated by the passing of a game ball is provided inside the special winning opening 20, and the specific area passage detection device 504 detects when a game ball passes through the specific area. Detect that. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state where the game ball cannot pass and an open state where the game ball can pass. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member so as to open the specific area in accordance with the control of the opening / closing control means 275 when the result of the lottery determination (also referred to as the result of the determination of success / failure) is a small hit. When entering a specific area is detected, a decision is made to shift to a special game. If no entry into the specific area has been detected, the game returns to the normal game after the small hit game is over.

  In the special game according to the first embodiment, the first special game (design big hit) that is executed when the symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a big hit, and the small hit after the symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a big hit. There is a second special game (small hit V) that is executed when the jackpot is developed. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the prerequisite technology, that is, triggered by a symbol jackpot. The second special game is a special game associated with the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device triggered by the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (also referred to as “V prize”) during the small hit game. It is.

  A state display lamp 502 for indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 500 is provided at the lower right position outside the gaming area 81. The status display lamp 502 is constituted by, for example, two lamps, and the first lamp indicates whether or not the time is short (in the present embodiment, it is accompanied by a state in which a normal electric accessory can be easily entered). The lamp indicates whether or not it is a game state to be right-handed (a state in which a normal electric accessory can easily enter a ball or an operating state of a special electric accessory). The first lamp is turned on when the normal game is in the short-time state, and is turned off when the normal game is in the normal state. The second lamp is turned on when the game is to be right-handed, that is, when the player is in the short-time state, the small hit game state, or the special game state, and is turned off when the player is in the normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed display light, and displays whether or not the game state is to be right-handed in a certain display mode.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 and the probability of the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 2 are both 1/319. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability of the symbol jackpot does not change and is always constant. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of special figure 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of special figure 1 may be larger than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value smaller than the small hit probability of special figure 2 at least.

  In addition, in the small hit game, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the special winning opening 20 for a predetermined time (for example, 1.6 seconds) of 1.8 seconds or less, and during that time, the specific area inside the special winning opening 20 is also open. Control to become. It is preferable to adopt a slide-type attacker type (a type in which a game ball can roll on the lid member of the grand prize opening and can enter when the lid member is opened). The upper part of the 20 or the flow path in the vicinity of the big prize opening 20 is configured so that a plurality of game balls stay in the vicinity of the entrance (the lid part or the like) of the big prize opening 20, for example, in a zigzag shape. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 20 is to repeat the opening of 0.124 seconds 13 times with a predetermined closing time in between, and even if the player's launch is delayed, the game ball is inserted. It is preferable to design so that it can. Thereby, when the big winning opening 20 is opened for a short time in the small hit game, it is possible to generate a ball to the big winning opening 20 and the small hit V with high probability. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment is configured such that a small hit V can be obtained if a small hit occurs.

  FIG. 28 shows a breakdown of jackpots in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The special symbol jackpot of Special Figure 1 includes 9R short-time 15R big hit, 9R short-time 4R big hit, and 1R short-time 4R big hit, and the distribution probability is 1%, 49%, 50%. In addition, the 4R big hit for one time reduction in the time reduction is the same control as the 4R big hit for nine time reductions. Therefore, in the big hits in the short time, 9 times are all given. The special feature 2's symbol jackpot is a 5R jackpot with 9 times shorter. The small hit V in the special figure 2 includes 9R big hit for 15 times, 10R big hit for 9 times, and 5R big hit for 9 times, and the allocation probability is 60%, 10% and 30%. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of time reductions is nine, but lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 can be carried out nine times, and the big hit probability based on the small hits or symbol big hits during the time reduction is Although it is about 61%, as a premier hit, a small hit V and a symbol big hit that will be 100 hours short will be provided, and the next continuation will be virtually guaranteed (with a probability of about 99.9% the next small in the short time) It may have a gaming state that gives the player a sense of security that the player can win.

1. Composition related to short-time and open lottery (normal symbol lottery):
There are three types of results for the open lottery, ie, the first lot and the second lot. The first hit is a hit with a long time opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (in terms of special symbol fluctuation conversion). The second hit is a hit with a short time opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the short time state, the winning probability per first is about 10/11, and the winning probability per second is zero.

  In the normal game in the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 has a plurality of game balls when the open lottery is the first hit (winning probability 1/590) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit. Is opened for a predetermined time (hereinafter also referred to as “long opening time”) that is longer than the time interval at which the rocket is fired. In other words, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting port 12. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in an open state so that Here, the time interval (shortest time interval) at which the two game balls are successively fired may be 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds. The long open time is less than 6 seconds, and the value is equal to or greater than the time interval at which the maximum number of reserved balls (four in the first embodiment) of Special Figure 2 (second winning / failing lottery value) is fired. May be. Further, the long open time may be a value that is longer than the time that is assumed to be required until the special figure 2 hold increases from 0 to 4 after the launch of the game ball. The long open time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

  The opening / closing control means 275 is the same as the above in the normal game in the short time state even when the open lottery is the first hit (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit. During the opening time, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened. It should be noted that the long open time of the ordinary electric utility 90 in the normal state and the long open time of the normal electric actor 90 in the short time state may be different, but each time, a plurality of (preferably four) games. It is set to a value greater than the time interval at which the ball is fired. In this way, in the normal game in the normal state, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with a chance to save a plurality of special figure 2 holds even in the normal state. In other words, the chance of acquiring the small hit V can be provided to the player a plurality of times. For example, in the game flow of FIG. 26, it is possible to provide a route for transitioning to a consecutive resort state from a normal time through a normal symbol hit.

  In addition, when the result of the open lottery is the second hit, the open time (“short open time”) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is shorter than the long open time, and the ball entering the second start port 12 is maximum. 1 or 2 times may be determined. Further, the short opening time may be set to a time during which it is substantially difficult to enter the second starting port 12.

  The operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is that the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entered into the second start port 12 is as shown in FIG. 2 (here, the second winning / losing lottery value). This means that the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment) of the reserved number has been reached. The opening / closing control means 275 (1) the elapsed time since the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state reaches a long open time (in the case of the first hit) or a short open time (in the case of the second hit). If at least one of (2) the number of balls entering the second start port 12 has been satisfied is satisfied, the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be closed. In other words, the state of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is switched so that entering the second start port 12 is impossible (difficult as a modification).

  The long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in a normal game that does not go through a big hit (short time) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). Due to the above-mentioned operation end condition, it is possible to suppress the excessive occurrence of the small hit V in the normal game that does not go through the big game (short time) which is an exceptional game flow, and it is easy to stabilize the payout rate within the design range. . Further, when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is prevented from exceeding the assumed value of four, and the payout rate based on the four fluctuations of the special figure 2 is assumed. It becomes easy to realize.

  Termination conditions are: (1) Big hit or small hit, (2) Number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 9 (when 9 times are given) or 1 (when 1 is given) (3) The number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 has reached 7 times, (4) The total number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 15 (when 9 times are given) or 7 times It is satisfied when any of the conditions (in the case of granting once in a short time) is established. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to a shorter time, and individually counts the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation number of the special figure 2 during the time reduction. The specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction when the above-described end condition is satisfied. When any of the above (2), (3), and (4) is established, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

  In this way, by setting each of the number of times of fluctuation in FIG. 1 and the number of times of fluctuation in FIG. That is, by the time when the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 reaches seven times, it is possible to expect a long opening to enter the second starter 12, and if the second starter 12 enters, Special Figure 1 The special figure 2 is preferentially fluctuated, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be obtained with high probability. The number of fluctuations of 7 in Figure 1 under the short-time end condition is the upper limit (4) of the reserved figure that can exist at the end of the special game, and the first start that may occur if left-handed by mistake It is the sum of insurance (three) for entrance into the mouth 11.

  As will be described later, since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is only a super-shortening fluctuation, the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment. As a modification, the number of insurances may be reduced (for example, one) if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is longer.

  The specific game control means 270, when the time-span end condition is satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped in the fluctuation (in other words, at the end of the fluctuation time). End the time saving and return the gaming state to the normal state.

  Here, the opening lottery (in other words, the normal symbol lottery) continues for one symbol variation time (that is, one variation time of Special Fig. 2) triggered by entering the second starting port 12 in the short time. When executed, the value is set to a value that is at least as long as the normal symbol hit can occur twice or more. In other words, the second variation pattern determining means 232 selects a variation pattern in which the variation time is defined as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 in the short time, at least a variation time that is longer than the time at which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more. For example, the variation pattern table is configured such that a variation pattern in which a variation time longer than a time at which at least two hits of a normal symbol can occur is defined as a variation pattern of the special figure 2 in a short time is selected. Also good.

  As described in the base technology, for example, the time for one fluctuation of the normal symbol in the time reduction may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time at which at least two hits of the normal symbol can occur is about 10 seconds (two fluctuation times of the normal symbol + one operation time of the normal electric accessory). In the first embodiment, the single fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the time reduction is set to a predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modification, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long open time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the normal symbol is the first hit.

  Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal symbol at the normal time, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to four times. This is because when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (four) of the number of reserves shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the normal game after the completion of 4R jackpot once per hour, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to 5 times for one time and four times after the hour. When the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (four) of the number of holdings shown in FIG. . However, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the time that the normal symbol hit can occur twice or more, the first normal hit of the second normal symbol occurs and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened, This is because it is possible to further enter the starting port 12 (typically, the special figure 2 holding is increased by one).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment, the chance through the jackpot that is given once in a short time is more advantageous to the player than the chance based on the normal symbol per normal time. Even if the shortest time is one time, it is possible to raise the player's consciousness to win a big hit by increasing the possibility of winning a small hit V than the normal time per normal symbol, , You can reward the player who won the jackpot.

  The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are provided with a special figure in which a special symbol that has been stopped is displayed in advance when the shortage of time ends when the special symbol variation is stopped when the lottery result is out of place. Increase the special symbol fixed time for fixed display only for a fixed time. In other words, the next symbol variation based on the reserved lottery value (typically, the second winner lottery value) is not started until the special figure fixed time that is set to be a particularly long time elapses from the end of the time reduction. The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 determine whether or not it is the fixed display timing of the special symbol. (1) The specific game control means 270 has ended the time reduction (big hit symbol, small symbol It is determined by detecting (except for the case where the time reduction ends due to the stop of the winning symbol). As a modification, the determination may be made by counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special diagram 2) in (2) time reduction. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the time-short end condition is independently determined for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 fluctuation may be executed at the normal time. More preferred.

  The special figure fixed time at the time-short end when the result of the lottery in the first embodiment is out of place is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal symbol is hit just before the time-shortening, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (5.9 seconds) ends before the special figure fixing time elapses. As a result, the special figure 2 hold increases more than expected (as a situation, if the special figure 2 does not have a fixed time of 6 seconds and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 starts during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, 1), it is possible to prevent an unintended fifth variation of the special figure 2 after the time is completed), that is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the small hit V exceeding the design range. .

  The effect determining means 303 executes the notice lottery when the result of the open lottery is off or the second hit, and according to the result of the notice lottery, the first hit occurs and the chance state (the length of the ordinary electric accessory 90) A notice effect (also referred to as a “gase notice effect”) with a content that is expected to enter the (open) state is displayed. For example, when the result of the open lottery is off or the second hit, the effect determining unit 303 may display the gasse notice effect with a predetermined probability. In the first embodiment, the above-mentioned gasse notice effect is not displayed based on the result of special lottery drawing.

  When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit (long open) during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state, the production determining means 303 produces an effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure ( A public power release effect (corresponding to a later-described hold charge effect) is displayed in a manner corresponding to the execution state of the decorative effect 61 or the like. The public train opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rushing effect”) that suggests the entry into the chance state. Further, the public train opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “right-handed navigation”) that prompts the user to make a right turn. The right-handed navigation may be a content that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at entering the second starting port 12 or may be a content that prompts the player to save the hold in FIG. Here, if the normal electric accessory is activated immediately after the stop display of the normal symbol, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to hold the hold sufficiently even if the player starts the right stroke by looking at the “right stroke navigation” Set a longer period of time, such as the normal symbol fixed time until the normal electric accessory is opened after the stop display, or the normal electric accessory operation start demonstration time, and use that time to make a right-handed navigation It is preferable to produce an effect. In addition, although the execution start timing of the electric train opening effect is assumed to be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the normal symbol indicates the first hit, if the right-handed strike is not executed, the normal electric accessory (special figure 2 start port) is used. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to enter the game ball, it may be executable from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, the remaining 5 seconds of the normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol is the first hit) At this time, a normal symbol winning effect that is a success pattern is executed with respect to the above-mentioned gasse notice effect, and a right-handed guidance effect that makes the player understand the situation to be right-handed in the remaining 5 seconds).

  If the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 during normal time (during non-short-time game) is not achieved reach or normal reach is established, the effect determination means 303 enters the change effect display (for example, over the change effect) and enters An effect may be displayed and the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in the super reach establishment, the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size without displaying the inrush effect. In other words, the effect determining means 303 may display the priority in a reach unreachable state or normal reach <general power opening effect <super reach priority. It should be noted that even when the special symbol change is not executed in the normal state, the first hit of the normal symbol can be established. Therefore, even if the fluctuating effect is not being displayed, the public power opening effect can be displayed. As for the display priority, in the rendering process for the effect display device 60, those displayed on the foreground are treated as high priority, those having a large effect display area are treated as high priority, Any display mode may be used as long as it is intended to be visually recognized by the player with priority.

2. Configurations related to multiple types of variation pattern modes:
FIG. 29 shows a plurality of types of variation pattern modes. The pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the variation patterns of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are determined with reference to a variation pattern table that is different for each variation pattern mode. Hereinafter, the variation pattern table referred to in the mode N is referred to as a mode N table.

  The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores a mode 0 table to a mode 7 table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects any one of the mode 0 table to the mode 2 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of FIG. 1 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects any one of the mode 0 table, the mode 3 table to the mode 7 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. . In other words, after the special game is over, the mode state of the variation pattern table of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is individually switched according to the number of fluctuations. By doing in this way, reference is made at the timing when there is a reception that wants to produce a special effect such as the final variation of the short-time game of Special Figure 2 among the short-time end conditions provided for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be shifted is shifted by executing the fluctuation of FIG.

  The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects a variation pattern with reference to the mode 1 table for the seven variations of the special figure 1 after 4R big hit (after the end of the special game) once in a short time, and then selects the mode 0 table. Referring to FIG. 1, the variation pattern shown in FIG. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 refers to the variation pattern referring to the mode 2 table in the case of 9 big hits (15R, 10R, 5R, 4R) with reference to the 7 variations in FIG. After that, referring to the mode 0 table, the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 1 is selected. The seven fluctuations in FIG. 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations in FIG. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define a fluctuation pattern of a super shortening fluctuation (about 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table are set so that the ultrashort variation is selected.

  When the first variation pattern determining unit 231 selects the variation pattern of mode 1 or mode 2, the effect determining unit 303 displays an effect indicating that a rush effect (time-short game effect mode) is being prepared. Also good. Further, the effect determining means 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and a notice effect pattern, the same applies hereinafter) that displays a dummy round effect, and display the dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be a content that makes it appear as if it is currently in a special game, or a content that makes it appear as if the last round of the special game is continuing. In addition, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a win, “winning notification effect fluctuation (10 seconds)” other than the “super-shortening fluctuation” may be selectable. The decorative symbol display on the effect display device 60 relating to the variation of the special figure 1 selected by the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is preferably performed so as not to stand out at the corners of the display area. When the fluctuation of the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is the fifth time, etc., the player may have left-handed without understanding the playability, so a dedicated right-handed guidance effect is displayed. It may be a thing.

  As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. When mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, the fluctuation of special figure 1 will occur at the time of left-handed when the retreat is terminated due to the fluctuation of special figure 2 (except when the time reduction is terminated by seven fluctuations of special figure 1) This is because there is a possibility of ultrashort fluctuation. As another modification, when mode 1 and mode 2 are provided, a dedicated effect corresponding to the super shortening fluctuation of special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determining means 303 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation after the extended villa state ends. The dedicated effect may be displayed.

  The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the mode 3 table for the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the 4R big hit for one time and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then, the variation pattern shown in Fig. 2 is selected. Since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal state is a chance to acquire the small hit V, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the mode 0 is a fluctuation pattern for chance effect. When the variation pattern for chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination unit 232, the effect determination unit 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and displays the chance effect.

  Further, the mode 3 table is set so that a variation pattern for chance effect is selected. The chance effect includes a hold charge effect. The hold charge effect is an effect that prompts the user to save the hold in FIG. The on-hold charge effect may be (1) content that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the second starting port 12, (2) content that prompts a right strike, or (3) right strike If not, the content may be disadvantageous. When the variation pattern for the chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination unit 232, the effect determination unit 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and the chance effect (hold charge effect is displayed as the special figure variation effect). Display).

  The variation pattern of the mode 3 table is a variation time longer than the time required for the new launch of the game ball in the time reduction, the operation port passing, the open lottery, the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol per, and the normal electric accessory 90 opening. Is specified. Here, when there is a disagreement in the open lottery, it is preferable that a variation time equal to or longer than the time when the open lottery and the normal symbol variation are set to two or more variations is defined as insurance. The reason for designing in this way includes that “the case where there are four game balls (special figure 2 upper limit on the number of reserves)” can be included in the operation end condition of the electric motor 90, and the mode 3 This is because if the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not actuated at least once while the table is changing, it is not possible to collect four holds in FIG. If the fluctuation in the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, the game will be in a short-time game state even after a special game. It may also contain what is executed.

  The second variation pattern determining means 232 is (1) referencing the mode 4 table once, (2) referencing the mode 5 table once, (3) referencing the mode 6 table seven times, in the case of 9 big hits. (4) Refer to the mode 7 table four times, and select the fluctuation pattern corresponding to 13 fluctuations in FIG.

  The mode 4 table defines a variation pattern for the big hit end demonstration effect as the variation pattern of the special variation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction. When the variation pattern for the jackpot end demonstration effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination unit 232, the effect determination unit 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the jackpot end demonstration, and displays the jackpot end demonstration effect. The jackpot end demonstration production includes the contents indicating the end of the jackpot (such as the current number of consecutive villas and the total number of balls displayed), the contents indicating the entry to the short time, the contents prompting the right hit, and the rush effect production mode selection screen (normal) Character selection such as a type, a type with a lot of notices, and a type with one notice). The reason for displaying the big hit end demonstration effect in the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the short time is to encourage the right-handed strike and to save the special figure 2 suspension. As another effect, it becomes easy to hide the special figure 1 fluctuation executed before the special figure 2 fluctuation, and it becomes easy to shorten the time from the end of the big hit to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation as seen by the player.

  When the effect determining means 303 receives a command for instructing execution of the jackpot end demo from the main board 200 (not information including the variation pattern of the mode 4 table), the effect determining means 303 (for example, the effect of the final round of the special game) May be continued. In this case, if the player stops launching the game ball in the final round, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 suspension will not occur and the end demonstration (the special figure 2 variable effect by the mode 4 table) will not be made indefinitely. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 is an effect that prompts the player to make a right turn after a lapse of a predetermined time after receiving the command for instructing execution of the jackpot end demonstration, in other words, an effect that prompts the second start port 12 to launch. You may display the effect. In particular, it is the first hit (big hit during non-temporary short), and when shifting to the game state of nine times shorter corresponding to the rush effect, it is often the situation that there is no hold of special figure 2, so only at the first hit The end demo effect may be executable during the big hit end demo time of the actual main board 200. In this case, the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a big hit or a small hit, change to (or in addition to) the big hit end demo and the number of rounds (outgoes) that have been acquired in addition to the previous special game round number (number of balls) The number of balls) may be reported, and an effect that the two big hits and the small hits are continuous may be reported. In addition, by performing an effect to notify that a hit is also included in the hold in advance at the time of the previous big hit and small hit start demonstration, it is possible to change the hit fluctuation of the mode 4 table from the end demo production without a sense of incongruity. However, at that time, in the production of the start demonstration, the notification type of the subsequent hit can be executed when the actual variation of the subsequent hit is executed by setting the subsequent hit type to be non-notification. Even during a big hit, it is not possible to know how many balls will be added, and it is possible to wait with a sense of expectation.

  The mode 5 table to the mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of effects (first roaring effect, second roaring effect, third roaring effect,..., Normal effect, etc.). A table in which different values are set may be used. By dividing the variation pattern table, it is possible to change the appearance frequency of the production. For example, it is easy to avoid the end of the extended villa state without any production of production. As a modification, the variation pattern of the special drawing 2 may be determined by one variation pattern table for the second variation to the fourth variation after the time shortening at the time of applying 9 times. Also, if the fluctuation time of mode 5> the fluctuation time of mode 6, the order of mode 5 and mode 6 is switched in order to ensure a long fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in the short time and to store the suspension of special figure 2 to the upper limit. May be.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment, a variation pattern table dedicated to the final variation is not provided for informing the player at the time-short game end timing often found in general pachinko gaming machines. The final variation in the present embodiment is a variation in which the special figure 2 suspension after the completion of the time reduction becomes 0 (mainly the fourth variation after the completion of the time reduction), and is typically the final variation of the special figure 2 in the extended state. . The reason is that, since the small hit probability in FIG. In addition, if a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the display of the ball is provided, it is normal for irregular situations, such as when the time is over due to special figure 1 fluctuations, or when there are only three special figure 2 suspensions at the time of the time shortening. There is a possibility that an outgoing ball notification effect will be displayed (originally a chance effect) during the special figure 2 fluctuation associated with the normal symbol per hour. In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a variation pattern table dedicated to the ball appearance notification.

  Here, the structure of the ball notification will be described. The effect determining means 303 is (1) when the special symbol that becomes the trigger for the completion of the time reduction ends as a result of losing, or (2) the second winning / failing lottery value remaining after the completion of the time reduction (that is, the special figure 2 hold) When the fluctuation based on the result is finished as a result of losing, an effect relating to the appearance of the ball up to that point (hereinafter referred to as “dealing notification effect”) is displayed for a predetermined time. The display time of the outgoing ball notification effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are cases where the effect state to be controlled by the effect determination means 303 returns from the time-saving state (rush effect) to the normal time. The above (1) is a case where there is no suspension in FIG. 2 when the short-term final fluctuation is completed. When the fluctuation of (1) or (2) becomes a big hit (including a small hit V), the ball appearance notification effect is not executed until the next short time end.

  Outgoing ball notification effects are: (1) special game play, (2) small game play, (3) short-time play (special figure 2 prizes such as starting and general prizes For (sphere), the content to notify only (1), the content to notify (1) + (2), the content to notify (1) + (3), or (1) + (2) + (3) The content to be notified may be used. The noticed ball may be the total number of balls in this extended period when one or more special games are continuously executed across one or more time savings. In addition, the noticed ball is the sum of the balls in the initial hit and the extended game state in FIG. 26, in other words, the number of balls that have been played until the normal time is returned to the normal time again after the initial hit in the normal time. It may be a total.

  In addition, the outgoing ball may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of prize balls), and the number of game balls that are out is subtracted from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase). The effect determining means 303 may acquire the number of game balls paid out from the payout control board 155, or may acquire the number of out balls from the out detection device 39 to count the number of balls.

  When the special symbol (that is, special diagram 1) indicating the result of the success / failure determination based on the entrance to the first starting port 11 is fluctuating, the effect determining means 303 appears in a manner with higher visibility than the fluctuating effect. The notification effect is displayed. Specifically, the effect determining means 303 may temporarily hide the variation screen of the decoration symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol 1 except when the decoration symbol 61 is stopped, and display the appearance notification effect. . Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the ball appearance notification effect in a region different from the variation display region (stop display region) of the decorative pattern 61 corresponding to the special diagram 1 variation. Further, when the effect determining means 303 displays the appearance notification effect, the special figure 1 fluctuation may be displayed on a screen smaller than normal (such as a wipe) or a screen smaller than the display screen for the appearance notification effect. Good.

  According to this aspect, the fluctuation effect relating to the special figure 2 having a relatively high probability of hitting is displayed without being disturbed by the ball announcement effect, and the time-shortening effect mode (rush effect) is ended depending on various situations. In such a case, it is possible to notify the appearance of the ball at a suitable timing and mode. It should be noted that the effect determining means 303, after the time reduction, (1) when both the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are not executed for a predetermined time, or (2) when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started. (Except when 10 minutes or more have passed after the end of the rush effect), it may be determined as the ball appearance notification timing and the ball appearance notification effect may be displayed.

3. Composition related to chance production:
The effect determining means 303 is changing the special figure 2 when the fluctuation pattern mode of the special figure 2 is mode 0 (in other words, when the special fluctuation figure 2 fluctuation pattern of the mode 0 is selected by the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232). , Display the chance effect. The chance effect (1) is displayed when the special figure 2 hold occurs when the normal symbol of FIG. Also, (2) Displayed during the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation) digestion after the completion of the time reduction after the 4R big hit of one time reduction. In either case, the four fluctuations in Figure 2 are assumed.

  Note that the gaming state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state) when the above (1) and (2) are in progress and the remaining suspension after the completion of the shortening (Special Figure 2 suspension) is being digested. However, since the variation pattern modes are different (different variation patterns are selected from different variation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is a chance effect and the latter is a rush effect.

  The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the above-described reserved charge effect when the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold charge effect for the time during which the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state. The on-hold charge effect may include an effect (general power opening effect) with a content that informs the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90. In addition, the hold charge effect may include an effect with a content for notifying the entry to the chance effect (chance entry effect).

  The hold charge effect and the chance entry effect are high priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determining means 303 (for example, an error display, a right-handed display, a decorative pattern at the time of stop display, a display of the number of holds, etc.) The priority is lower than the information necessary for the game, and the priority is higher than other notice effects that are changing). This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, whether or not the small hit V has a great influence on the appearance, it is important to store the special figure 2 hold for acquiring the small hit V. However, if a bonus item (hereinafter referred to as a “special feature”) having a high probability of jackpot expectation (for example, about 70%) is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 500 when operated in a specific mode, the special feature The production by may be executed with priority over the hold charge production and the chance entry production. In addition, during the display of the hold charge effect and the chance entry, the effect of operating a character other than the special character (a character having a lower degree of expectation of the big hit than the special character) may be canceled.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation is started during the display of the reserved charge effect in the normal time, the effect determining means 303 changes the special figure 2 after the display of the reserved charge effect (after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90) is finished. The variation display of the corresponding decorative design 61 is started. In this case, the effect determination means 303 may start the change of the decorative design 61 based on the change effect pattern corresponding to the change pattern of the special figure 2 in the middle. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the variation display of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 during the display of the reserved charge effect in a region different from the display region of the reserved charge effect. You may display on the area | region smaller than the display area of a charge effect (wipe display etc.).

  As described with reference to FIG. 29, during the time saving after the completion of one time reduction 4R big hit, the hold charge effect is displayed at the first change in FIG. The effect deciding means 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 for a short time (in order to make it possible to identify the fact that the fluctuation is occurring, a small decorative symbol 61 is displayed). This is because the special figure 1 fluctuation in the short time is fixed for 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly connected to the ball are not displayed.

  The effect determination means 303 holds both in the normal state when the normal symbol is the first hit (long open), during the short time after the 4R big hit of one time reduction, and in the case of the first change in the special figure 2 Display the charge effect. However, the former is an effect during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the latter is different in an effect during fluctuation of the special figure 2. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened, the effect determining means 303 displays the reserved charge effect and also changes the special figure 1 (including deviation fluctuation). The variation effect of the corresponding decorative pattern 61 is displayed smaller than the reserved charge effect (wipe display or the like).

  The display priority of the hold charge effect in the normal state is set according to the state of the change effect of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the special figure 1 change. For example, if the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is not of high importance such as super reach, the effect determining means 303 displays the reserved charge effect in a mode with relatively high visibility, and the variation effect of the decorative design 61 is displayed. May be displayed in a mode with relatively low visibility. A mode with high visibility means that the display size is large, the color is conspicuous (brightness, high saturation, etc.), the effect is added, or it is drawn in front of other effects. May be included. If the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 1 has a high importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed, and the hold charge effect is displayed in a small corner or the like of the screen of the effect display device 60 (simply made smaller). (The display may be changed in form such as simplification of display), and the super reach effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 may be displayed greatly.

  The effect determination means 303 holds both in the normal state when the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open), in the short time after the 4R big hit of one time reduction, and in the case of the first change in the special figure 2 The charge effect is displayed, and after the hold charge effect is finished, the chance effect is displayed as the fluctuation effect of FIG. The effect determining means 303 basically proceeds the chance effect based on the player's button operation, but a dedicated effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when the player operates a button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, and the like. On the other hand, when the player does not operate the button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect through a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc. This is a special effect during operation and is not displayed during button operation. The effect determining means 303 may perform the effect lottery of the notice 4 when there is no operation when the effective period of the button elapses, or draws both the effects to be executed when there is no button operation at the start of fluctuation. As a specification to perform, a suggestion effect (for example, special button image display or mini character icon display) in which the notice 4 appears without operation may be executed during the button effective period.

  The effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect both in the normal state when the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) and in the case of the first variation of the special figure 2 in the short time. With respect to the special figure 2 suspension generated during the display of the effect, whether or not it is hit (so-called prefetching) is detected based on prior determination information (preliminary success / failure determination information in the first embodiment). In the normal state, the effect determining means 303 pre-reads the presence / absence of symbol big hits and small hits, while in the short time state, it pre-reads only the presence / absence of small hits. This is because the symbol big hit of Special Figure 2 in the short time state is lower in profit than the small hit V.

  As described in the base technology, the effect determining unit 303 displays a hold lamp image indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 and the hold number of the special figure 2 at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60. The effect determination unit 303 displays the prefetching result as a pending change. For example, when the special figure 2 hold is a small hit (or symbol big hit) as a result of prefetching, the effect determining means 303 changes the hold ramp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold from the normal mode to the small hit (or symbol big hit). ) To a special mode. For example, when the hold lamp image indicates a present box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

  In addition, the effect determining unit 303 may further execute the prefetching of the special figure 1 hold. The effect determining means 303 cancels the pre-reading results that have been executed so far and the pre-reading effect that has been executed so far, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs during execution of the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold. May be displayed. As an exception, a pre-reading effect that changes the lottery mode of the variation effect pattern, such as a transition of an effect zone that changes the tendency of the effect (such as the type of characters that appear and the world view), may be executed as it is.

  In addition, even if the effect determining means 303 detects a symbol jackpot in the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold, if the big hit is caused by the fluctuation of another hold before the jackpot hold, Do not execute the effect to notify the big hit. When the big hit of special figure 1 is confirmed and the small hit V occurs from the first hit of the normal symbol, the special figure 1 big hit is digested without saving special figure 2 hold during the time reduction, and the number of times is reset Because it becomes possible. This is because, for example, a capture method that increases the possibility of a new small hit V by changing from 1 to 9 times a short time will occur.

4). Configuration related to Renso state:
The consecutive resort state is a mode in which a direct transition is made at 50% of the special figure 1 big hit in the normal state, and a straight transition is made in the small hit V after the normal symbol first hit in the normal time. When the time is short in the consecutive resort state, typically, 9 times are shortened + 4 times remaining are executed, and a special drawing 2 lottery with a small probability of 1/10 is executed a total of 13 times. The probability of winning small hits or big hits during the 9 times short is about 61%, and the probability of winning small hits or big hits for the remaining 4 times is about 34%. About 75%.

  The effect determining means 303 displays the big hit end demonstration and the hold charge effect (right-handed navigation) according to the change pattern of mode 4 at the first change of the special figure 2 in the time shortening of the consecutive resort state. The effect determining means 303 executes the special figure 1 change before the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the shortage in the consecutive resort state (when the special figure 2 hold is 0), and the special figure 1 is a big hit, During the final round effect of the game (or during the end demonstration effect), a predetermined character (such as a special character) may be operated to output an effect that makes it appear as if the jackpot has been extended. As another aspect, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not the jackpot has been extended with the appearance of the special game, such as temporarily stopping the special game round effect and rewinding it during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 that is a big hit. You may look like A similar effect can also be executed when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit.

  The effect determining means 303 displays the rush effect as the changing effect of the special figure 2 during the time-saving in the consecutive resort state. The rush effect is designed on the assumption that the special figure 2 hold will remain at the maximum (four) at the end of the short time. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation of the small hit V is high even with the remaining hold after the short-time end (small hit probability 1/10), so it is important that 4 special figure 2 hold are accumulated at the short-end end. . Therefore, the effect determination means 303 displays the hold charge effect even in the special figure 2 fluctuation of the last time (9th time) in the time saving in the consecutive resort state.

  The reserved charge effect at the short-time special figure 2 final change is the content that prompts the game ball to be aimed at the second start port 12, similarly to the reserved charge effect at the short-time special figure 2 initial change. The effect determining means 303 may display the reserved charge effect at the short time special figure 2 final change superimposed on the corner of the change effect of the decorative design 61. In the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time reduction is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display the hold charge effect only for the final fluctuation (separate from the first fluctuation). In the case of adopting a specification that can select two variations, the reserved charge effect may be displayed from the seventh variation or the eighth variation.

  It is assumed that a player who is used to one type and one type of gaming machine is likely to make a stoppage during a long time fluctuation, but at least the final charge will display a hold charge effect, which is very small V It is possible to suppress the player from losing the opportunity to acquire a large profit.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment, the final change (9th change) of the special figure 2 in the time reduction is set longer. The symbol fixed time is a time for which the stop display is continued after the special symbol variation is stopped, and is a time for delaying the start of the next symbol variation based on the reserved lottery value. The symbol fixed time of the special figure 2 final variation in time reduction is set to be longer than the opening time (6 seconds) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 associated with the first hit of the ordinary symbol, and is set to 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The symbol fixing time at another time point may be shorter than the symbol fixing time of the special fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the time reduction, and may be, for example, 1 second or 0.5 seconds.

  On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270 displays the special figure when the short-term end condition is satisfied by the special figure 2 fluctuation, in this case, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches nine. When the stop display of 2 is displayed, the time reduction is terminated. In other words, the time reduction is terminated before the symbol fixed time transition. Therefore, even when the normal symbol is the first hit just before the end of the time reduction, the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixing time. In the special symbol fixed time, since the short-time state has ended, even if the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, the probability of hitting the first symbol is rarely 1/590. This prevents +1 special figure 2 reservation from occurring for four special figure 2 reservations at the time-shortening end point. If the special figure 2 hold of +1 occurs, it is not preferable in that the possibility of occurrence of a small hit is higher than the design, and it is not preferable in that the chance effect is displayed immediately after the rush effect. In addition, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit at 1/590 after the short-time end, the hold charge effect that is a general electric power release effect may be executed as in the normal time, and in such a case, When the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that occurs after the four fluctuations for the rush effect is a change in the mode 0 table, the chance effect is continuously executed after the rush effect. Although the production data increases, the continuity with the rush production is produced in the production determination means 303 when the fluctuation production pattern for the rush production can be provided for the fluctuation pattern of the mode 0 table. Control may be performed so that the rush effect is continued even in the fluctuation of the mode 0 table.

  The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before the time reduction end and after the time reduction end. For example, the effect determining means 303 selects the change effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect having the same or similar contents in both the mode 6 change pattern and the mode 7 change pattern. Display rush effects with the same or similar content. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the time is short and middle (right-handed is advantageous), even though it is after the short-time has finished (left-handed is advantageous).

  The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a “right-handed recommended image”) that prompts the player to make a right stroke during the time. The effect determining means 303 is a symbol after the 10th change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (that is, the first change of the special figure 2 after the time reduction is finished) or after the ninth change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. Instead of the right-handed recommended image, an image of content that prompts the player to left-handed (referred to as “left-handed recommended image”) may be displayed from a fixed time.

  However, since the content of the presentation is the same before and after the short-time end, it may cause confusion for the player if flashing left is recommended. Therefore, it is not desirable to store the special figure 1 suspension in advance. Therefore, the effect determination unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image smaller than the right-handed recommended image. In addition, the effect determining unit 303 may display the left-handed recommended image instantaneously or for a short time, or may display it temporarily or every predetermined time.

  Further, the effect determining means 303 hides the right-handed recommended image from the 10th change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect or from the symbol fixed time after the 9th change of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. The left-handed recommended image may also be hidden. In this case, left-handed may be recommended only by the lighting state of the status display lamp 502. In addition, it is desirable that the timing for starting the display so that the left-handed recommended image is conspicuous in the production is simultaneously with the appearance notification effect or after the appearance notification effect. At this time, when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed, it is preferable to display the recommended left-handed image at a timing that does not overlap with the timing at which the decorative symbol stops in order to notify the game result. .

  The variation production pattern for the rush production may include (1) pseudo variation production 4 to 8 times (at least 4 times) (2) notice production, (3) reach production (only some variation production patterns). , (1), (1) + (2), (1) + (2) + (3), the variation effect corresponding to the variation of one special figure 2 ends. In general, in the small hit high probability pattern (special drawing 2) in the small hit V-spec, only the pre-reading information regarding the success / failure can be notified in advance. In addition, the symbols and variation patterns of the reserved lottery values are unknown until the symbol variation based on the lottery values is executed. On the other hand, the player is accustomed to continuous prefetching effects including symbols and fluctuation patterns in conventional models, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable without such prefetching effects. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation is displayed by the pseudo prefetch effect in the pseudo variation effect that is similar in appearance to the prefetch effect of the conventional model. The pseudo-change effect is actually 1 by actually stopping the change of the decorative symbol 61 for a time (0.5 seconds, etc.) less than a predetermined reference value (temporary stop) and then restarting the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol 61. Although it is a fluctuation of the number of times, it is a content that makes it seem that the number of times of fluctuation is made. Along with the temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-variation, (2) the notice effect and (3) the pseudo-prefetch effect that suggests the execution expectation level and the execution content of the reach effect are performed. As an example of the pseudo-prefetching effect, a pre-reading chance that the combination of decorative symbols categorized into the same type (color, form, character, etc.) temporarily stops temporarily, the effect pattern displayed around the screen temporarily stops, For example, the effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to the one with high expectation at every re-variation.

  The effect determining means 303 responds to the fluctuation of the immediately preceding special figure 2 as the prefetching effect in the original meaning that affects the next symbol fluctuation, according to the prior determination information of the lottery value corresponding to the next symbol fluctuation. A zone transition symbol stop pre-reading effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation effect. The zone transition symbol stop pre-reading effect is a content for notifying that the next symbol variation will be displayed in the high expectation effect mode. In addition, when the next change is a small hit or missed in the special figure 2 (gase is executed), the effect determining means 303 displays the zone transition symbol stop pre-reading effect with the current change, while the next time In the case where the success or failure of the change is the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 2, it is not necessary to execute the zone transition symbol stop pre-reading effect with this change (because of low profit). Also, even if the next change is a small hit, if the current change develops to (3) reach production, we are paying attention to the result of the change (decoration pattern decoration). The prefetching effect using the transition symbol may be excluded from the lottery. For this reason, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as to determine whether or not the next hold is made every time the fluctuation in FIG. 2 starts and to perform a pre-read lottery according to the type of fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation to be started. On the other hand, when the final stop symbol of the fluctuation becomes a zone transition symbol despite the reach fluctuation, a method of notifying that the next fluctuation will be confirmed may be adopted.

  The effect determining unit 303 hides the reserved lamp image during the rush effect. This is because the significance of the pseudo-variation effect is lost if the number of reservations is notified by the reservation lamp image. On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 displays the remaining number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during short time). For example, since the remaining number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 is 8 in the second fluctuation of the special figure 2 (first fluctuation of the rush effect start) at the time reduction, “8 + extra” is displayed, In the second variation, “7 + extra” is displayed. “Extra” indicates the fluctuation due to the special figure 2 remaining suspension after the time reduction. In addition, when the special figure 2 hold digested after the end of the time reduction actually occurs, for example, when the hold 4 occurs after the sixth change of the special figure 2 in the time reduction, the effect determining means 303 determines that “extra May be displayed. The number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed as a number including the current fluctuation, or as the number of fluctuations until the end of the short time excluding the current fluctuation. The remaining number display may not be expressed directly as “N remaining times”, but may be expressed as a long-distance expression such as “N days / 8 days + extra”. At this time, the N day (morning), the N day (noon), the N day (night), the N day AM 10:00, the N day PM 2:00, the N day PM 8:00, etc. Along with the display, it may be displayed separately from the above (1) pseudo-variation period, (2) notice effect period, and (3) reach effect period. Furthermore, when the minute portion (and the hour portion) of the 12-hour notation is advanced for each pseudo-variation, the expected degree of winning when the time reaches the “Nth day PM5: 55” at a certain timing, etc. A method of notifying that the value is high or that the hit is confirmed may be adopted.

5. Configurations related to the game standby demonstration:
The effect determining means 303 displays an image of a predetermined game standby demonstration on the effect display device 60 when the change of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not performed for the predetermined standby demonstration transition time. The game standby demonstration may be a video showing a theme, a motif, a story, an outline, etc. in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

  The standby demonstration transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the ordinary figure holding means 242 holds the ordinary drawing lottery value up to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the holding number of the common drawing lottery value is four, the longest fluctuation time of one fluctuation (in normal state) when the normal symbol is out of place or the second hit is 10 seconds, The maximum time for one variation in the case of winning is 15 seconds (in normal state). In this case, the longest time when the first symbol (long open) of the normal symbol is notified the latest in a situation where the special symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit and the variation of the special symbol is not executed. Becomes 45 seconds (10 seconds × 3 on hold + 15 seconds × 1 on hold). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set longer than 45 seconds, for example, 60 seconds.

  As described above, the effect determining means 303 determines that the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 is used when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Display the hold charge effect that prompts the launch. The standby demo transition time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the ordinary drawing lottery value is held to the upper limit, so that the normal symbol becomes the first hit during the display of the game standby demo and is normally electric It can be avoided that the bonus item 90 is opened for a long time, in other words, it can be avoided that the reserved charge effect is displayed during the display of the game standby demonstration. This makes it easy to prevent the player from losing an opportunity to win the small hit V without noticing the reserved charge effect. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the first hit of the normal symbol has a great influence on the gameability, it is preferable to treat the normal symbol variation display as a state in which the game is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress state of the game based on the variable display from being misidentified as non-game based on the display of the game standby demonstration.

  As a modified example, the effect determining means 303 has detected that a game ball has entered one of a plurality of winning holes or a plurality of winning holes provided in the gaming area 81, and the waiting demonstration transition time has not been detected, and If Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is not changing, an image of a game standby demonstration may be displayed. The plurality of winning holes or winning holes include a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33. Presence / absence of the winning may be detected by sensors (first start winning detection device 16, second start winning detection device 17, etc.) provided in each of the winning opening and the winning opening. This modification also has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  As another modification, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the first start port 11 and the first operation port 31 are provided close to each other in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has passed through the first operation port 31 is almost certainly (or 100%). ) A game area 81 (game nail, windmill, etc.) may be configured to enter the first starting port 11. In addition, the game area 81 may be configured such that the game balls entering the first start port 11 are limited to the game balls that have passed through the first operation port 31.

in this case,
The waiting time for transitioning to the standby demo may be set so that the average fluctuation time for the reservation of four special symbols (here, special symbol 1) + standby demo transition time> the maximum fluctuation time for the four normal symbols reserved. For example, when the maximum variation time of four normal symbols held is 45 seconds and the average variation time related to digesting four special symbols is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds) ) May be set. This modification also has the same effect as the above embodiment.

  The present invention has been described based on the first embodiment. The first embodiment is an exemplification, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. A modification is given below.

  Modification 1 will be described. As described above in part in the first embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays the reserved charge effect when the normal electric accessory 90 is released in the normal game in the normal state with the first hit of the normal symbol. May be. Then, during the display of the reserved charge effect, the effect determining unit 303 may reduce the display (wipe display) of the variation effect of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. For example, the variation effect of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the reserved charge effect. Further, the variation effect of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the reserved charge effect is not executed.

  As in the first embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game during the short time is also shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment). ). In the first modification, the effect determining means 303 continuously displays the jackpot end demonstration and the hold charge effect from the end of the final round in the special game until the end of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time saving. The effect determining means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative design 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 while displaying the hold charge effect in the normal game during the short time.

  In the meantime, the effect determining means 303 does not display the variation effect of the decoration symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special illustration 1, and only the stop mode that is the result of the variation effect is a simple symbol (smaller than the normal decoration symbol 61). (Design). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be indicated by a simple symbol. Further, when the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 occurs in the short time, the effect determining means 303 may notify the symbol jackpot by the operation of the special accessory described in the first embodiment.

  In this way, the effect determining means 303 of the modified example 1 reduces the visibility of the variation effect of the special figure 1 during the time shortening more than when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is released due to the normal symbol first per normal time. Display. Thus, when the significance of the variation effect of FIG. 1 is relatively low, the player can benefit from a reserved charge effect or the like by displaying the variation effect in an inconspicuous manner or hiding it. It is possible to emphasize other presentations that are more important for acquiring

  Modification 2 regarding the second start port 12 will be described. FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the start port unit 510. The start port unit 510 is a component in which the first start port 11, the second start port 12, and the plurality of general winning ports 33 are integrated. The start port unit 510 is provided below the center decoration 64. That is, the second start port 12 of this modification is provided at the center lower part of the game area 81. FIG. 31 is a top view of the start port unit 510, and the lower side is the front side.

  FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the start port unit 510, specifically, a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. The left-handed channel 512 is a channel that guides the left-handed game ball to the left-out port 514. The right-handed channel 516 is a channel that guides the right-handed game ball to the right-out port 518. In other words, a game nail, a windmill, or the like in the game area 81 is set so that only a game ball that has flowed to the right and that has flowed through the right channel of the center ornament 64 can flow into the right-handed channel 516. .

  The slide plate 520 functions as the ordinary electric accessory 90, and in this modification, functions as a guide member that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right-handed flow path 516 to the second start port 12. In a state where the slide plate 520 is retracted, the game ball (game ball 524 in FIG. 32) flows from the right-handed flow path 516 to the right-out port 518 and does not flow into the second start port 12. The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and protrudes so as to close the inlet of the second start port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. Thereby, the entrance into the 2nd starting port 12 can be blocked reliably. Further, the blocking member 522 is in a retracted state when the slide plate 520 is in a protruding state, and opens the inlet of the second start port 12.

  When the normal symbol is a hit, the opening / closing control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state, but the opening / closing control means 275 of this modification brings the slide plate 520 into the protruding state. At the same time, the blocking member 522 is controlled to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right-out port 518 is blocked, the entrance of the second start-up port 12 is opened, and the game ball rolling in the right-handed flow path 516 flows into the second start-up port 12. According to the starter unit 510, it is possible to reliably enter the second starter 12 in other situations while allowing the second starter 12 to enter the ball when hitting the normal symbol.

  Modification 3 will be described. When the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (typically at the time of the first hit), the effect determining means 303 does not hold the hold charge effect (general power open effect). It is good also as a display. This is to display the hold charge effect in the special figure 2 fluctuation in the short time after the big hit. If the special figure 2 hold is stored first, the special figure 2 hold is likely to remain at the end of the extended villa state because of the special figure 2 priority digestion. This is because it is better not to execute the fluctuation in FIG. 1 as much as possible. According to this configuration, when the first symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 and the reserved charge effect is never displayed, the symbol big hit of the special symbol 1 is determined. In addition, when it is prohibited to pre-read special figure 1 hold at the normal time immediately after the consecutive villa state ends, it can be said that it is difficult to display an important effect related to the special figure 1 fluctuation during the appearance of the appearance of the ball. The hold charge effect may be displayed during the hit variation, and the special figure 2 hold may be stored. In addition, the timing when the normal symbol is the first hit is not during the hit fluctuation of Special Figure 1, but the hit confirmation notification in the pre-reading of Special Figure 1 (for example, a premier hold display, the number of times after a big hit is indefinite) Even in the process of executing, a prohibition pattern for prohibiting display may be provided. By doing in this way, when the transition from the small or big hit of Special Figure 2 to the rush state before the Special Figure 1 hit is confirmed, the Special Figure 1 will be hit nine times in a short time. It is because it will be possible.

  Modification 4 will be described. When the consecutive resort state (temporal shortening + 4 holds) ends in an irregular manner, specifically, when the temporary shortening ends due to the seven fluctuations of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 holds at the end of the temporary reduction 3 In the case of the number of pieces or less, the fluctuation pattern mode in the special figure 2 at the normal time can be used for the rush effect (mode 3 to mode 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs in normal time, the variation pattern for the rush effect or the variation pattern for the hold charge effect is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 variation, and an unintended effect is displayed by design. There is a possibility that.

  In order to cope with this, the effect determining means 303 rushes in the normal game in the normal state after the special figure 1 has changed a predetermined number of times after the transition to the short time or after the completion of the short time (for example, after the special figure 1 fluctuation has been completed ten times after the transition to the short time). When a variation pattern for production is selected, a variation production pattern for chance production may be selected as an alternative, and the chance production may be displayed. Or the effect determination means 303 may display that it is an irregular effect and a display with a telop etc., displaying the rush effect under the said condition.

  Modification 5 will be described. As described above, the short-time game may be ended by any of the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 as described above. If the short-time game ends based on the fluctuation, and if the short-time game ends based on the fluctuation of the special figure 2 when the special figure 1 is in the mode 2, the small hit is further won and enters the specific area. If not, control may be performed so that the mode of the variation pattern table in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is set to “0”. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected in the special figure 2 suspension generated from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

  Modification 6 will be described. Since the rush effect of the first embodiment is fixed to 9 fluctuations in time and one fluctuation is relatively long (10 seconds or more), it is assumed that the player stops (shooting is stopped). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of time reductions in the consecutive resort state is made indefinite (for example, determined from 1, 3, 5, 9, 13 times according to the winning symbol from a plurality of types), and 1 variation is also compared. It may be a short time (about 5 seconds). In this way, when a stop is made, it is possible to suppress the stop by making the specification with a risk that the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored.

  Modification 7 will be described. You may comprise so that it may be easy to create the 5th fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 after time reduction completion. For example, (1) the condition for ending the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be set to the retention upper limit number + N (N is a positive integer) in FIG. In addition, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of time reduction may be set to the same length as normal time or shorter than normal time. In addition, (3) the ball sensor (second start winning detection device 17) of the second start port 12 is arranged at a back position away from the entrance of the second start port 12, and the fourth time of the special drawing 2 after the time reduction is completed. After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new special figure 2 hold may be easily generated. Moreover, you may combine said (1)-(3). In the case of the configuration of the modified example 4, instead of the priority digest in FIG. 2, the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 may be drawn in parallel, or may be drawn in the winning order.

  Modification 8 will be described. The effect determining means 303 changes this time when it detects by pre-reading that there is another small hit in the remaining hold when the symbol variation won in the small hit (when the small hit V changes, hereinafter “current change”). A special big hit effect with a content different from the normal big hit effect may be displayed as a big hit effect (for example, a special game effect) with a small hit V. The special jackpot effect may include content for notifying that two 15R jackpots have occurred. When the modified example 7 is adopted, the small hit V in the special drawing 2 may be only 15R big hit.

  Also, as in the first embodiment, even when the small hit V in the special figure 2 is distributed to multiple types of big hits, the big hit effect is informed that the small hit V due to the current fluctuation is the maximum profit, and after the big hit ends Alternatively, it is possible to display a continuation effect that makes it appear as if the big hit continues, and to display a big hit effect that makes it look like an extra at the next small hit V. In this case, since the number of rounds of the next small hit V (addition amount per extra) is unknown and cannot be notified at the previous small hit V, the continuous effect is being displayed after the end of the previous big hit. The additional amount (number of rounds) per extra may be notified at the start of symbol variation related to the small hit V.

  Modification 9 will be described. Here, a specific example of the production will be described. 33 (a) and 33 (b) are chance effects at normal times (the effects that are displayed in the normal game in the normal state when the normal symbol is released for a long time, and can be said to be a normal train opening effect, a rush effect, and a hold charge effect. .) Example. FIG. 33A shows an aspect of the chance effect 530 when the fluctuation effect in FIG. 1 is not a predetermined content with high expectation such as super reach. In the chance effect 530 of FIG. 33 (a), a special figure 2 reserved image 532 showing the content for urging to the right and the reserved number of special figure 2 (two in the figure) is displayed at the center of the screen. On the other hand, the fluctuating effect 536 of FIG. 1 that has been displayed largely in the center of the screen until the chance effect 530 is displayed is reduced and displayed on the wipe 534 that is a small area of the screen corner. Even when the special effects 1 and 2 are not executed, the normal standby screen is displayed as a wipe, and even if the changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are started, the chance effect is generated. The variation effect is displayed as it is on the wipe screen until is finished.

  FIG. 33B shows a display form of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect in FIG. 1 is a predetermined content with high expectation such as super reach. In the figure, a super reach variation effect 536 including a super reach object 538 such as a battle image of a character is displayed large in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed in a small size on the wipe 534 at the corner of the screen. 33 (a) and 33 (b) show how to properly use the chance effect at the normal time. The timing for determining the appropriate use of these is different depending on the variation effect mode executed at the start timing of the chance effect. For example, in the case where the fluctuation effect of FIG. 1 is super reach, if the change is before super reach transition, the change effect is executed with the wipe display shown in FIG. Is displayed (specification for returning to the super reach screen when the chance production ends, that is, when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90 ends). In addition, it is good also as a specification which changes from the aspect of FIG. 33 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 33 (b) at the timing which transfers not only to this example but to high expectation degree effects, such as super reach. In addition, although it is possible to change the aspect of the chance effect depending on whether or not a high expectation pattern such as super reach is selected as the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1, if configured as such, It becomes the specification that the transition to the high expectation production can be detected first after the start of the fluctuation before the transition to the super reach.

  FIG. 34 shows an example of a chance effect during a short-time game (for example, an effect displayed when the variation pattern mode is mode 3 and can also be said to be a hold charge effect). Even in the chance effect 530 during the short-time game, the content for urging the right-hand strike and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as already described in the first embodiment, during the short-time game, the variation effect of the special figure 1 is not displayed, and the chance effect is made to appear as the variation effect of the first short-time game variation of the special figure 2. Yes. Therefore, it differs from the normal chance effect in that the fluctuation effect 536 is not displayed by the wipe 534. The reason for giving the chance effect as the variation effect of the special figure 2 is a game characteristic that, when the variation effect only for notifying the success / failure is executed, particularly in the case of one time reduction, the reserve is accumulated. This is because the game cannot be fully understood, and may cause a disadvantage to the player. In the case of a variation effect in the case where the first variation in time reduction in FIG. 2 is a win, the chance effect may be not executed, or an effect for notifying the success / failure is executed after the chance effect. May be.

(Second embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the second embodiment has a feature related to control or performance around the small hit development jackpot in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the base technology and the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of common points will be omitted. In addition, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology and the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 according to the second embodiment has the following five features as main features.

Features 1. The ability to play in small hit games:
Conventional small hit development jackpot machines have used two V winning prize openings with a specific area and two special prize winning openings for winning many balls. Since the opening of the V winning prize winning opening and the opening of the ball winning winning prize opening are due to the operation of different special electric accessories, the number of winning balls and the number of balls entering the V winning winning opening (regulated count) The small hit game was terminated early, and the big hit game was shifted to early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment (a machine with a small hit development jackpot), the number of special electric accessories (big prize opening) is one. In the small hit game, the maximum winning opening is opened up to 15 times, so that a lot of prize balls can be obtained in the small hit game, and a new game and fun are realized.

Feature 2. Small hit game production:
Performing an effect to make the player understand the possibility of winning a small hit game (that is, the first round of the small hit development jackpot) after winning the V prize in the small hit game (that is, after acquiring the right of the big hit) Then urge the player to launch.

Feature 3. Small hit development jackpot production:
From the first round of jackpot development jackpot (that is, the jackpot game), you can expect to win a prize ball equivalent to one round during the jackpot. The display of “1 round” is started in order to notify that a winning ball equivalent to 1 round that is a big hit can be obtained.

Feature 4. Production at the start of jackpot in the jackpot development jackpot:
An effect that suggests the amount of profit that the player can obtain is executed between the first round (small hit game) and the second round (first unit game of the special game) in the small hit development jackpot.

Feature 5. Small hits look-ahead:
By pre-reading the small hit hold, the fact that the next small hit development jackpot can be acquired in a short time is notified until the end of the current small hit development jackpot.

Hereinafter, the above five features will be described sequentially.
<Feature 1. Outlet earning in small hit games>
FIG. 35 shows a basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment. The second starting port 12 has a normal electric accessory 90 that is a ball entering variation mechanism that can be displaced so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called a so-called electric tulip, and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be any of a slide type (for example, a specification that makes it easy to enter a ball when the slide member advances forward or retracts backward), a tulip type, and a tongue type.

  The special game control means 260 operates the special electric accessory 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 causes the opening / closing control means 275 to control the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 to open the special winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small hit game control means 265 operates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small hit game. The small hit game control means 265 causes the open / close control means 275 to control the specific area open / close solenoid 506 to open the big prize opening 20 a plurality of times during one small hit game.

  The special winning opening 20 includes an opening / closing member (a slide plate 540 described later) for switching between the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 20. When the big prize opening 20 is in a closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member. FIG. 36 is an external perspective view schematically showing the configuration of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 can also be said to be an open / close door of the special winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the slide plate 540 has a closed state that covers the top of the special winning opening 20 (box-like member 542) and an open state in which it is retracted back as shown in FIG. 36 (b). It can be displaced between. When the slide plate 540 is closed, the special winning opening 20 is also closed, and when the slide plate 540 is open, the special winning opening 20 is also opened.

  The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the big prize opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined so as to be lowered to the left with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 tends to accelerate as it is, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game ball cannot be guided well inside the box-shaped member 542. There is a fear.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 is made to progress in a zigzag shape, thereby increasing the moving distance of the game ball and reducing the momentum of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540. Thus, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the special winning opening 20 repeats opening for a short time for an extremely short time, the time for the game ball to stay on the slide plate 540 is lengthened, and the game ball enters during the short time opening. To increase the possibility.

  FIG. 36A shows the special winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is in the closed state. As shown in the drawing, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions are also provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. The plurality of projections 546 a on the game board side and the plurality of projections 546 b on the transparent plate side are alternately arranged along the flow path on the slide plate 540. The plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are attached to a transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 covering the front side of the game board 80, when the transparent plate 103 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside. It can be prevented from becoming easily damaged. Further, by configuring the transparent plate 544 with a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the special winning opening 20 from being impaired. In the modified example, a protrusion or a recess for forming a zigzag channel may be formed on the slide plate 540.

  By providing the plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b alternately on the slide plate 540, the game balls can be advanced in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game balls tends to decelerate. For example, a game ball is continuously fired rightward (for example, one ball is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds) toward the big prize opening 20 and rolls on the slide plate 540 and falls to the left side of the big prize opening 20. When the vehicle is decelerated so as to require a time of 2 to 3 seconds, there are always about 3 to 5 game balls on the slide plate 540. As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short time, a plurality of game balls can be guided together inside the special winning opening 20, as shown in FIG. The game balls dropped into the box-shaped member 542 pass through the passage opening 548 one by one, and a winning detection is made.

  The number and staying time of the game balls staying on the slide plate 540 can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the special winning opening 20, the number and interval of the protrusions 546a and 546b, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is designed so that 1 to 3 game balls stay on the slide plate 540 when the right-handed continuous firing is continued, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short time (for example, 0.052 seconds). Even when it is displaced to the opened state, approximately 1 to 3 game balls are adjusted to enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short-time opening. Therefore, according to the configuration of the big winning opening 20 of the present embodiment, if an appropriate launching operation (for example, right-handed) is performed at an appropriate timing (for example, after a right-handed notification) during the small hit game, 20 can be entered almost certainly.

  The configuration of the special winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 36 is merely an example, and the special winning opening 20 having a structure different from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening / closing member (slide plate 540) of the special winning opening 20 may include a plurality of opening / closing members provided at distant positions, and the plurality of opening / closing members may be controlled to be opened / closed simultaneously.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the special winning opening 20, and particularly shows the configuration of the lower region 550 of the special winning opening 20. As shown in FIG. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the special prize opening 20 according to the control of the special prize opening solenoid 92. The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in an open state and operates the slide plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the special winning opening 20, so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening 20. And The special winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 in a closed state and operates the sliding plate 540 so as to close the entrance of the special winning opening 20, so that the game ball cannot flow into the special winning opening 20. And The game balls that have entered the big prize opening 20 once flow in the left direction, and flow into the lower area 550 of the second big prize opening 22 from the passage opening 548 that can pass one ball at a time. The big prize detection device 25 detects the game ball entering the big prize opening 20 to give a prize ball, and specifically detects the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 548 and dropped into the lower area 550. To do.

  A discharge path 554 is provided in the lower region 550 of the big prize opening 20. The discharge path 554 is a path for discharging the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 20 to the outside of the special winning opening 20, and is typically a path for discharging to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 500. . In the lower region 550, a specific region opening / closing device 552 is provided in the middle of the flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554. The specific area that is a condition for shifting to the small hitting development big hit corresponds to an area below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and can be passed when the specific area opening / closing device 552 is opened, and the specific area opening / closing device 552 is closed. If it is, it will be impossible to pass.

  The specific area opening / closing device 552 operates to switch between an open state that allows passage to the specific area and a closed state that disables passage to the specific area. The specific area opening / closing device 552 has a slide member or a valve member that operates according to the control of the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506. The specific area opening / closing device 552 operates so as to open the flow path to the specific area, so that the game ball can pass to the specific area, and operates to block the flow path to the specific area. As a result, the game ball enters a closed state in which it is impossible to pass the game ball to the specific area. The specific area opening / closing device 552 shifts to the open state with the opening of the special winning opening 20, and after the special winning opening 20 is closed, the internal game ball is expected to flow down to the position of the specific area opening / closing device 552. It waits for the design value and operates so as to be closed after the transition to the closed state of the big prize opening.

  The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and detects the passage of a game ball in the specific area. The specific area passage detection device 504 generates specific area passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through the specific area. Upon receiving the specific area passing information, the ball entering determination unit 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed the specific area.

  In the second embodiment, both the unit game in the special game and the small hit game are finished when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, both the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the unit game of the special game and the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit game both reach the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20. Including that. Specifically, the special game control means 260 determines that the end condition of one unit game of the special game is when a predetermined time has elapsed or the number of balls entered into the big prize opening 20 has reached ten. Terminate as if is satisfied. The small hit game control means 265 ends the small hit game on the assumption that the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 has reached ten. Note that the V winning is not the end condition for the small hit game, and the small hit game continues after the V winning until the end condition is satisfied.

  One opening time of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the big winning opening 20. Further, the small hit game control means 265 opens the special winning opening 20 for a short time via the open / close control means 275 in one small hit game (during the single operation of the special electric accessory 556). It can be repeated a predetermined upper limit number of times. The upper limit number is equal to or greater than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 (that is, 10), which is a condition for ending a unit game and a small hit game in a special game (in other words, an operation ending condition for the special electric accessory 556). It is the number of times. In the embodiment, the number is 15 times greater than the number of balls entered. The small hit game control means 265, when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game reaches 10, even if the number of times of opening the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game is less than the upper limit number (15). At that time, the special winning opening 20 is closed and the small hit game is ended.

  The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) for the first to twelfth large winning opening 20 in the small hit game. Repeat the set of short-time closures (closing time 1 second). Also, the small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and the big winning opening 20 for the 13th and 14th opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game. A set of long-time closures (closing time 4 seconds) is performed. Further, the small hit game control means 265 performs an operation with an opening time of 0.052 seconds for the opening of the fifteenth big prize opening 20 in the small hit game, and when the fifteenth release is completed or the operation end condition When a game ball with a specified count number is entered, the closure is performed for 3.5 seconds.

  According to the configuration of the feature 1, only one big winning opening is arranged in the game area 81, in other words, the big winning opening for obtaining the V winning and the large winning opening for increasing the number of balls are made common. Thus, it is possible to secure a wide board surface area for performing the display of the effect and the operation of the accessory, thereby enhancing the interest of the effect. Further, in the small hit game, the same special electric accessory 556 is operated as in the special game, so that the payout with the common number of prize balls is performed, and the small hit game is controlled in the above-described release mode. Based on the above, it is possible to expect a predetermined number of balls, which is the condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory, so that it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as a single unit game of a special game, and enough for the player. A feeling can be given.

  As described in relation to FIG. 36, when the player keeps firing the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20, so that the single winning opening 20 once in the small hit game. Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected. However, there is a possibility that the right hit of the game ball may be delayed because the player does not notice the start of the small hit game. Therefore, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is set to be equal to or larger than the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 which is a condition for ending the small hit game (in the embodiment, the number of times larger than the number of winning balls). Thus, in the small hit game, it becomes easy to obtain the same amount of balls as one unit game of the special game.

  Furthermore, with regard to the 13th and 14th opening of the big prize opening 20 in the small hit game, the closing time is made relatively long to promote the player's awareness, and the small hit game is not fired. End, that is, missed opportunity to win the small hit development jackpot, or the end of the time reduction based on the occurrence of the small hit game, the occurrence of the small hit (small hit V) with high probability It becomes easy to prevent the variation of the received second special symbol from becoming difficult to execute. However, if the number of times of closing is increased too much for a long time, the number of out balls (so-called waste balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 when the player continuously fires the game balls increases. Therefore, by closing the large winning opening 20 for a long time in the small hit game twice, both the suppression of the end of the small hit game without the V winning and the suppression of the increase in the out ball are achieved.

  In the second embodiment, for the multiple opening of the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game, all the opening times are 0.052 seconds, but as a modification, at least one opening time. However, it may be different from other opening times. For example, the small hit game control means 265 may open the special winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the special winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small hit game. . In other words, it is only necessary to release the time that is assumed to be at least one of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 of the big winning opening 20 into the big winning opening 20 ten times or more.

<Feature 2. Small hit game production>
The effect determining means 303 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 60 during the small hit game, and changes the display mode of the effect image according to the ball entering the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game. . This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determining means 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, with a predetermined probability). As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small hit game.

  The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 which is a condition for ending the small hit game. As described above, the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 (that is, the prescribed count number), which is a condition for ending the small hit game, can be said to be the upper limit number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The number is 10 balls, which is the same as the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 as a condition for ending the unit game in the game.

  FIG. 38 shows an example of the effect during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 displays the small hit game effect screen 560 on the effect display device 60 during execution of the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 includes a right-handed instruction image 562 for prompting the player to make a right-hand shot, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and a number-of-balls notification image 566 as a first effect image. The V notification image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number-of-balls notification image 566 includes the same number of treasure box images as the number of balls (10 balls) that have entered the big winning opening 20 which is a condition for ending the small hit game. In FIG. 38, the unopened treasure chest is shown by a rectangular parallelepiped, and the opened treasure chest is shown by a star.

  The effect determining means 303 switches one unopened treasure box image to an opened treasure box image each time a ball entering the big prize opening 20 is detected by the ball entering determination means 201 during the small hit game. . This suggests to the player that 10 balls can be entered into the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game, in other words, that many balls can be acquired during the small hit game. The player can be prompted to fire a game ball during a winning game.

  The second effect image will be described. The second effect image is an image (hereinafter also referred to as an “expected degree image”) indicating the degree of expectation that suggests a high profit (possibility of acquiring many appearances) in the later suggestion effect. The expectation image can be said to be an image that suggests that there is a possibility of acquiring a lot of balls in later games. Details will be described below.

  Similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 28), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment is also stopped in a mode in which the symbol variation shows a small hit (hereinafter referred to as “small hit symbol”). In this case, the number of rounds per jackpot development jackpot differs depending on the jackpot design. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds per jackpot development jackpot is divided into either 10 rounds or 4 rounds depending on the jackpot design (both games are small hit games).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of time reductions (in other words, the number of times of electric chew support continuation) differs according to the small hit symbol. Specifically, if the small hit symbol is a specific type, it will be a small hit development big hit with 10 rounds and a short-time duration of 100 times. It will be a big hit per jackpot or a big hit per jackpot with four rounds and a short duration of 9 times. When the number of time reductions continues is 100, the next small hit occurs almost certainly during the time reduction (during rush production) and becomes a consecutive resort.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1, depending on the jackpot symbol, (1) a jackpot of 10 rounds and 9 short-time continuations, (2) 4 rounds and a short-time continuation The game is divided into 9 big hits, (3) 4 rounds and 1 short run. The distribution probabilities (1) to (3) in the embodiment are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The special symbol jackpot of Special Figure 2 is a big hit with four rounds and nine short-time durations.

  When the V winning is generated in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303, after the small hit game ends, the player decides according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit (that is, the type of the small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). One of a plurality of types of suggestion effects that suggest profits that can be acquired is displayed. For example, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are associated with one of a plurality of types of small hit symbols, and each round number of small hit development jackpots determined by the small hit symbol, every number of short durations after the end of the small hit development jackpot, or , It may be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of short-time continuations. In addition, the contents of multiple types of suggestion effects (motifs, characters, colors, etc.) differ depending on the amount of profit that the player can obtain. The suggestion effect will be described later in the description of feature 4.

  The effect determination means 303 is an expectation image indicating an expectation degree that suggests a high profit (for example, a big hit of 10 rounds or 100 times a short time) during the small hit game. Is displayed. For example, the effect determining means 303 may display an expectation image instead of the number-of-entry notification image 566 on the small hit game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. It may be displayed. In addition, the V notification image 568 that is an image for informing that the V prize has been won, in other words, an image for informing the winning of the big hit may be used as the expectation image.

  The effect determining means 303 changes the expectation image according to the ball entering the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 may change any one of the shape, pattern and color of the expectation image according to the ball entering the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game. For example, (1) the expectation image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the color of the V notification image is red, orange, yellow, green, white from the one with the highest expectation of the profit that the player can obtain. (3) It is assumed that the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds and 100 short-time continuations. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when the V winning is detected in the small hit game. Every time a predetermined number (for example, one ball or two balls) of balls in the grand prize opening 20 is detected after the V winning, the effect determining means 303 changes the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, red. You may change in order.

  In the above example, when the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20 during the small hit game increases, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so that the player's sense of expectation for the subsequent suggestion effect and profit state Can be increased. Thus, as the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the small hit game increases, the accuracy of the expectation image increases, in other words, the reliability of the content of the suggestive effect indicated by the expectation image increases. In other words, by making the ball enter the big prize opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify the expectation level that suggests a high profit by the later suggestion production, so the game ball during the small hit game (especially after the V win) Incentives for launching can be given to players. Further, even in the small hit game, it is possible to make the player feel the gameability that allows the player to obtain a ball corresponding to one round of the special game.

  The V notification image 568 is an image that is displayed after the game ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the special winning opening 20, and a game ball that has already been entered in the small hit game when the display is started. The number (remaining number of possible entrances) may vary depending on the situation, so the initial display should be standardized in the manner of entry such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance-up pattern that eventually becomes more than red) A mode that changes according to the sphere is displayed in accordance with a predetermined change pattern from the time of entering the second ball to the time of entering the tenth ball, skipping the changing mode in the middle when changing according to the winning prize. The method to do can be adopted. In this case, “white (initial)”, “green (3)”, “yellow (5)”, “orange (7)” (the numbers indicate the number of game balls that have entered during the small hit game, which is the changing timing. In the case of the pattern of (shown), when the passage is detected by the specific region passage detection device 504 in the fourth ball, “white” is displayed as the V notification image, and the V notification image is displayed when the next game ball enters (the fifth ball). Will be yellow. In this way, by adopting the method of skipping the display mode in the middle, it is not necessary to have an effect determination table according to which ball passed the specific area, and furthermore, when entering the ball, it is fixed as a lottery result Since it is displayed, whether or not the display of the initial mode is a chance pattern and the final change mode can be identified. It should be noted that the pattern that changes in accordance with the winning game entrance 20 may have an additional pattern for the eleventh and twelfth balls that is called an over-winning that exceeds the specified count (normally) The 10th ball corresponds to the final mode, and the over winning prize is equivalent to the 10th ball, or the production pattern is set so that an exceptional premiere appears).

  In addition, the effect determining unit 303 may change the expectation image so that the expectation image shows content different from the content of the suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%). For example, when the content of the subsequent suggestion effect suggests high profit, the expectation image may be changed to indicate that the expectation is low. Similarly, when the content of the later suggestion effect suggests low profits, it may be changed to an expectation image indicating that the expectation is high. As a result, the player's expectation and anxiety can be mixed, or the player can have an unexpected feeling, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  A modification related to feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls that have been paid out (number of balls to be paid out). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of the number of prize balls that have been paid out. The winning ball counting means may count the number of winning balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the number of winning balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200. Alternatively, the entry determination unit 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub-board 300 of information indicating the entry of game balls into each winning opening. The winning ball counting means may count the number of winning balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the information indicating the winning to the big winning opening 20 notified from the main board 200. . It should be noted that the number of winning balls when one ball enters the big winning opening 20 is twelve.

  The effect determining means 303 of the present modification displays a small hit game effect screen 560 as shown in FIG. 38 during the small hit game, and the small hit count counted by the winning ball counting means is displayed on the small hit game effect screen 560. Acquired prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls paid out during the game is displayed. Here, the acquired prize ball information is in the format of “Ode / X”. “Ode” indicates the number of prize balls that have been paid out to date. “X shot” indicates the maximum number of winning balls that can be paid out in this round, in other words, the maximum number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player in this round.

  As described above, the small hit game of the second embodiment is designed so that the specified count number (that is, 10 balls) can be entered while the big winning opening 20 is repeatedly released for 15 times. Therefore, “× departure” in the small hit game may display “120 shots” (12 prize balls × 10 entrances per entry), which is the number of prize balls in the specified count. However, since the small hit game is a specification that repeats short opening, and it is not certain that the winning ball will be acquired, the effect determining means 303 of this modified example is for both “○ departure” and “× departure” during the small hit game. The initial value is “0 shots”, and 12 shots are added each time a ball enters the big prize opening 20. This makes it difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied even if 10 balls have not been entered into the big prize opening 20 during the small hit game due to the opening / closing timing of the big prize opening 20 or the like.

  As will be described later in connection with the feature 4, the effect determining unit 303 displays a suggested effect suggesting a big hit type (number of rounds, etc.) at the start of a special game in the small hit development big hit. The effect determining means 303 of the present modification updates “x departure” of the acquired prize ball information to a value corresponding to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggested effects, in other words, the timing of suggesting the number of rounds. Specifically, the value of “× departure” (that is, the number of winning balls in the small hit game) is the value of (round number −1) × 12 winning balls per pitch × 10 times of winning Is set to “X”. For example, in the case of 10 rounds, a value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of winning balls in the small hit game is set to “× shot”.

  According to the configuration of this modified example, it is easy to give the player a sufficient sense of play by presenting the player with the number of winning prize balls for the first round (small hit game) of the small hit development big hit. The effect determining means 303 may execute a round number promotion effect that increases the number of rounds of the special game in appearance (for example, increases from 4 rounds to 10 rounds) during the special game. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may update “× departure” in accordance with the apparent number of rounds (adding “720 departures” corresponding to six rounds when a promotion effect occurs). Further, the acquired prize ball information may further include the cumulative number of prize balls during consecutive games (that is, while repeating the jackpot acquisition during the short time), and the effect determination means 303 is in the consecutive games counted by the prize ball counting means. The total number of award balls that have been paid out may be displayed as the cumulative number of award balls.

<Feature 3. Small hit development jackpot production>
As shown in the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 38, when the V winning is generated during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a V notification image 568 that is an effect for notifying that the V winning is achieved. In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating the cumulative number of times that the special electric accessory 556 has been operated from the small hit game to the special game, triggered by the V winning in the small hit game.

  The effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating that the special electric accessory 556 is operating for the first time during the small hit game after winning the V prize. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, a round image 564 showing the first round is displayed. During the small hit game, the slide plate 540 of the special winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times, but the special electric accessory 556 is operated once. When the small hit symbol corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds, a round image 564 showing the 10th round is displayed in the final round of the big hit big hit.

  According to the feature 3, an image indicating “the first round” or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count displays are performed from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to win a ball equivalent to one round of special games in the small hit game, and the player can be encouraged to fire the game ball even after winning the V prize during the small hit game. In the case of a small hit game without a V prize, the second and subsequent rounds (special game) are not executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 on the condition of V winning, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the second and subsequent rounds continue when there is no V winning.

<Feature 4. Production at the start of jackpot in jackpot development jackpot>
As described above, the first type of profit that a player can obtain for a special game executed when winning a V-winning game, and the normal game after the end of the special game, At least one of the types of the second profits that can be obtained differs depending on the type of the small hit symbol at the time when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The first profit is, for example, the number of rounds per small development jackpot, and includes 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second profit is, for example, the number of short-time continuations, and includes 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

  When the V is won during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303, after the final opening of the big winning port 20 in the small hit game is finished, the big winning port in the special game executed following the small hit game. Until the first opening of 20, a suggestion effect that suggests the type of profit that the player can acquire is displayed according to the type of the small hit symbol that triggered the small hit game. The suggestive effect is at least one of the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit development big hit, the number of times of the operation of the continuous action device of the special item in the special game, and the number of short durations after the special game (for example, 100 times, 9 times, etc.) The content may suggest one or any combination. For example, the suggestion effect may include contents for displaying the bonus names “XX bonus”, “XX bonus”, and “ΔΔ chance” corresponding to the combination of the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of short-time continuations.

  In addition, the suggestion effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestion effect may display a content that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. The effect determining means 303 is a content that suggests the type of profit that the player can acquire when a predetermined button operation (for example, pressing a button more than a predetermined number of times) is input while the suggested effect is displayed, for example, the bonus described above. The name may be displayed on the suggestion effect screen.

  FIG. 39 shows the display timing of the suggestion effect. The effect determination means 303 is a closing period (3.5 seconds) after the last opening of the big prize opening 20 in the small hit game + starting demonstration time of the accessory continuous operating device (playing action starting demonstration time) (10. 5 seconds), in other words, the suggestion effect is displayed between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. FIG. 39 shows the situation where the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is opened 15 times. However, when the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 reaches 10 during the small hit game, at that time. The small hit game ends, and no matter how many times it is opened, a 3.5 second closing period is provided after the opening. Further, the expectation degree effect described in the feature 2 is executed before the suggestion effect.

  According to the feature 4, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by suggesting the kind of profit that the player can acquire in relation to the small hit development jackpot. In addition, by displaying the suggestion effect on the condition that the V winning in the small hit game is a condition, it is possible to prevent the content of the effect from being inconsistent with the actual profit when the V winning is not generated in the small hit game.

  A modification related to feature 4 will be described. When there is no V prize in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 has a closing time (3.5 seconds) after the final opening of the big prize opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration of the small hit game (for example, 0. 0). The failure effect may be displayed within 1 second). The failure effect may be content that suggests or informs that the jackpot will not develop, or content that suggests or informs that acquisition of the planned profit has failed. In FIG. 39 of the second embodiment, the end demo time of the small hit game is not set when winning V, but this is because the end demo time (set in advance when winning V) ( The reason for canceling V (0.1 seconds when no prize is awarded) is to be canceled (one that is not executed as "0 seconds" or that is not substantially implemented as "0.004 seconds (1 interrupt)"). is there.

  Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect determining means 303 has a special content that suggests that the occurrence of the next jackpot development jackpot (in other words, the consecutive hit of the jackpot development jackpot) is substantially confirmed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An effect may be displayed as an suggestion effect. The special effect may include, for example, a display of “VV bonus” indicating that a bonus is continuously generated. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small hit development jackpot is substantially determined. Specifically, as explained in (1) Feature 5, there is information that will be a small hit in the hold by pre-reading, (2) The current big hit (small hit symbol) is given 100 times short-time continuation number It may be what is done.

  Still another modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. The effect determining means 303 can execute the suggestion effect executable period, that is, after the final opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game is finished, the special winning opening 20 in the special game executed following the small winning game. Until the first release, in addition to the suggestion effect, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed (displayed simultaneously with the execution of the suggestion effect or after the end of the suggestion effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which music to be output from the speaker in one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. The character selection effect is an effect in which a character (that is, an effect mode that is an embodiment of the effect) to appear in the effect in one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. It may be.

  In the small hit development jackpot, the small hit game is the first round, and the number of rounds in which the big hit effect (special game effect) can be executed is one round less. Therefore, by making it possible to select a song or character between rounds 1 and 2, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the song or character selected by the player for a longer time.

  Still another modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestion effect is displayed during the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. . As a modification, the suggestion effect may be displayed during the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, when a small hit end demo (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of the small hit game in which the V winning is generated, the last closing period (3.5 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game + small The suggestion effect may be displayed during the period of the hit end demonstration time (0.004 seconds) + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device.

  Still another modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 may further include vibration detection means for preventing fraud. The vibration detecting means may detect the presence or absence of vibration when the big prize opening 20 is opened in the small hit game, and may execute predetermined fraud notification processing (warning display, notification to an external device, etc.) when vibration is detected. . Generally, in unit games or small hit games of special games that open and close a special winning opening having a specific area, vibration detection is made effective during the opening period and the remaining ball detection period after the opening period ends. According to the structure of the feature 4, the timing of the vibration detection is removed and the suggestion effect is performed (if the vibration detection effective period is 5 seconds from the transition to the closing period of 3.5 seconds of the big prize opening, the suggestion effect is performed. Since the button effective period is generated after 6 seconds from the start), it is possible to provide a suggestion effect in which vibration occurs, such as an effect of causing the player to press the button. Note that in the button effective period, a display indicating that the effective period is to be reached (button image is faded-in display, etc.) before the image display indicating the effective period (image display imitating the effect button 109). However, when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the effective period, so the button display introduction effect is performed. It is preferable to shift the start of the operation after the effective period of vibration detection ends.

<Feature 5. Look-ahead for small hits>
As described in the base technology and the first embodiment, the pre-determining means 235 of the main board 200, when there is a ball entering the second starting port 12, is a lottery value (e.g. Regardless of whether or not the symbol variation based on (Win / Draw lottery value) is started immediately, the result when the winning / failing determination (main determination) based on the lottery value acquired by the entry is executed is a big hit or small It is determined in advance whether or not to win. The pre-determination means 235 transmits, to the effect determination means 303, pre-determination information indicating that a big hit or a small hit is caused in the variation corresponding to the incoming ball when the result of the pre-determination for that ball is a big hit or a small hit. . In addition, the prior determination information transmitted to the effect determination means 303 is transmitted in a manner in which it is possible to identify whether a big hit or a small hit is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, information indicating the success / failure range “4” is transmitted as the prior determination information, so that it is possible to identify the small hit.

  The effect determining means 303 has one or more lottery values for which the winning determination is received from the main board 200 for the inside of the hold for the special figure 2 when the V winning is generated during the small hit game. When the special game is finished and the normal game is started after the V prize is received, an effect is given in advance of the occurrence of the small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game (hereinafter referred to as “small hit notice”). May also be executed one or more times. In other words, the effect determination means 303 indicates that at least one or more small hits are executed when the right to shift to big hits is acquired during the small hit game, and there is a hold that makes the winning lottery a small hit. The small hitting notice effect of the content to be suggested or notified may be executed in a period from the end of the big hit until the short time state is started. The hold to be prefetched for small hits is the special figure 2 hold that becomes the main game in a short time. In the embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays the V stock images that appear as if “V” is stocked in appearance as the small hitting notice effect for the number of small hits to be notified.

  The effect determining means 303 can execute a small hitting notice effect at a plurality of notice timings from the time of winning a V to the transition to the short time state after the end of the small hitting development jackpot. The plurality of notice timings are configured such that the larger the number of rounds per jackpot development jackpot, the larger the number of notices held on the jackpot. Specifically, the plurality of notice timings in the second embodiment are at the time of winning a V, the third round of the jackpot development jackpot, the ninth round of the jackpot development jackpot, and the jackpot end demo. At each of the plurality of notification timings, the number of small hits to be notified is limited to one. That is, the V stock image increases by one in one small hitting notice effect.

  Therefore, only when the number of rounds per jackpot is the maximum (specifically, 10 rounds), it is possible to execute the four jackpot notices, that is, all four holds (Special Figure 2 holds) When it is a small hit, it can be suggested to the player. In other words, if the number of rounds of small hits is 4 rounds, the 9th round of small hits notice effect cannot be executed, so even if all four holds are small hits, a maximum of 3 small hits notifications Stay on. The effect determining means 303 determines by lottery how many times the small hitting notice effect is to be executed and at what timing when the small hitting notice effect is to be executed, with the upper limit being the number of pre-determined results for the small hits that are put on hold.

  In addition, when the prior determination information for all four existing holds is information that is a small hit, the effect determining unit 303 executes the four small hits notice effect, but at least one of the small hits notice is included As an effect, a premier effect may be displayed. The premier effect is a rare effect that is not displayed except when all four holds are small hits, and may be content that suggests or informs that a very large profit can be obtained.

  According to the feature 5, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that the small hit development jackpot can be continuously acquired in the machine with the jackpot development jackpot. Yes, it can further enhance the fun of the game.

  A modification related to the feature 5 will be described. When three small hits are reserved during the first small hit development big hit (or big hit) that has been generated previously, the effect determining means 303 conceals one small hit and conceals two V stock images. May be displayed. When the second small hit development jackpot is reached due to the fluctuation immediately after the end of the small hit development jackpot, the V stock image is updated to be reduced to one (at this time, the hold existing from the first small hit development jackpot is present) 2 small hits inside). In addition, when one hold generated during the fluctuation of the second small hit is a small hit (the small hit within the hold changes to three), the effect determining means 303 accompanies the second small hit. During a small hit game or a big hit game, even if the V stock image is increased by two including the number of small hits in the hold that existed during the first small hit development big hit, a small hit announcement effect is displayed. Good. As described above, the definition of the first jackpot development jackpot and the second jackpot development jackpot is a special game performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after winning V in the jackpot game. However, since the execution timing of this small hit pre-reading effect includes “V winning” as described above in this embodiment, there is a case where a small hit pre-read (V stock notification) is performed during the small hit game. In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit look-ahead executed by "first small hit development jackpot" and "second small hit development jackpot".

  As a technique 1 for realizing this, the effect determining means 303 uses pre-judgment information in the case of a small hit or a big win (for example, when a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol is stopped, or when a V prize is won in a small hit game). Based on this, the number of small hits on hold may be specified. The effect determining means 303 calculates the difference between the number of displayed V stocks and the number of small hits on hold, and selects either of the V stock effect patterns that can be notified by lottery up to the difference. May be. For example, a small hitting notice effect for increasing the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

  Also, as the method 2, the effect determining means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the hold based on the prior determination information at the time of the small hit or big hit, and the pattern of the small hit announcement effect based on the specified small hit number (For example, the display timing of the small hitting notice effect) may be determined. The effect determining means 303 may cancel the display of the small hitting notice effect according to the number of displayed V stocks at the display timing of the small hitting notice effect based on the determined pattern, and replace it with a normal effect pattern. Also good. For example, if 3 small hit announcement effects (during V winning, 9th round, end demonstration) are determined, and 2 V stocks are being displayed before the small hit, You may cancel the hit announcement effect (for example, the back 9th round, at the end demonstration).

  According to this modification, in order to specify the number of small hits that are reserved for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), special effects when the number of reserved small hits is maximum (four) (premier effect) Can increase the opportunity to perform. In addition, since the timing for displaying the fourth V stock image by the small hitting notice effect varies, for example, the effect determining unit 303 turns each V stock image into a rainbow color when four V stock images are accumulated. It is preferable to change and display a special effect (premier effect) in the normal game immediately after the end of the small hit development jackpot.

  Another modification related to the feature 5 will be described. Even if there is no small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303, if the number of short-time continuations after the end of this small hit development big hit is a predetermined value or a predetermined value or more, by lottery (with a predetermined probability) A small hit announcement effect similar to the case where there is a small hit may be displayed. In this modification, a small hitting notice effect (that is, a V stock image) can be displayed when the number of short-time continuations is 100. This is because the hitting probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is 1/10, and the hitting occurs almost certainly during the 100 fluctuations in the short-time state. Note that the number of short durations for displaying the small hitting notice effect is not limited to 100, but may be a value equal to or greater than the number of times that the small hitting is expected to occur almost certainly according to the small hitting probability. It should be noted that the V stock image displayed in the small hit announcement effect of the present modification must be deleted even in the case of a big win that does not require a subsequent V winning, unless the V stock image suggesting that it is a chance to win a V winning. There is a risk of misunderstanding about subsequent games (decrease in display reliability due to possible occurrence of a situation where there is no single hit even though there is a V stock display). The hit notice effect is referred to as a second small hit notice effect.

  According to the second small hit announcement effect of this modified example, the fact that the V stock image remains even after digesting four holds after the small hit development big hit, the fact that the possibility of executing the big hit (or big hit) is extremely high Can be executed continuously, and an unexpected production can be realized. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the “HOLD” image on the V stock image at the time of the fourth hold (disconnection) after the small hit development big hit, and displays “HOLD” until the big hit or the small hit fluctuation. The displayed V stock image may be maintained. The effect determination means 303 may end the display of the “HOLD” V stock image at the start of the symbol change of the big hit or the small hit, during the change, or at the end of the change.

  In the present embodiment, the V stock display is subtracted and displayed when notifying that the execution of the small hit game is deterministic in the execution of the small hit variation (the display is deleted in the case of 0). The reason for erasing the V HOLD image that is “HOLD” for the V stock display for the short time of 100 times in the modified example is that the time duration is reset when the big hit is reached, and if the time duration is short, the short stock This is because there is no compensation for the occurrence of. For the same reason, when there is no jackpot in the hold and there is a jackpot, the second jackpot notice effect is displayed even if the number of short-time continuations after the end of this jackpot development jackpot is greater than or equal to the above predetermined value I won't let you. Or, even if the lottery for the small hitting notice effect is won, the execution of the effect is canceled.

  Still another modification regarding the feature 5 will be described. The effect determining unit 303 has a small hit and a big hit in the hold, and even if the big hit fluctuates before at least one of the small hits, the small hit notice effect in which the number of the small hits in the hold is notified by the V stock image. Is displayed. The effect determining means 303, as a V stock digestion effect, from the start of small hit change to the start of the small hit game, the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small hits). In this case, the V stock image itself is decreased by one.

  On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 maintains the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image across the big hit period without changing the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image when the big hit changes. The effect determining means 303 displays a small hitting notice effect for increasing the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image during the big hit game if there is a small hit in the big hit change during the big hit change or the big hit game. You may let them.

  The effect pattern of the V stock digestion effect executed in the small hit fluctuation in the normal game in the short time state may include an effect pattern of a special mode such that the V stock image is erased by emitting rainbow colors (normal pattern). Examples include those that emit white light and are erased). When the small hit symbol of this time brings high profits (for example, 10 rounds of small hit development big hit or 100 times of short-time continuation), the effect determining means 303 has a special aspect as the effect pattern of the V stock digestion effect. A pattern may be selected to display a special V stock digestion effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively notify the player that a high profit will be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the determination in advance regarding the suspension of the special figure 2 that is digested in the normal game in the short-time game, which is referred to when the production determining means 303 decides to execute the small hit announcement effect, It does not include information related to the stop display mode (small winning symbol), and uses the prior determination information related to the random number used for the determination of success / failure, and determines in advance only whether or not the hold is a small hit. For this reason, at the stage of being displayed as a V stock image, it is not possible to determine the types of small hit development jackpots that occur at each V winning opportunity, so the number of V winning opportunities is simply displayed. However, as in this modification, the V stock is switched to the digest effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the effect determining means 303 when the fluctuation is actually started. It is possible to diversify the production using images and improve the interest.

  Still another modification regarding the feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction when a small hit occurs. For this reason, if the V-winning game is not won (so-called puncture), after the small-hit game is finished, the normal game is not the short-time game. If the effect determining means 303 displays a V stock image indicating that at least one small hit is held at the end of the small hit game, but has not won V in the small hit game, after the small hit game ends An effect that makes it appear as if the time has been continued may be displayed. In other words, the effect determining means 303 may display the effect in the short-time state (or the effect of the approximate content) as the effect in the normal game in the normal state after the small hit game ends.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to connect to the next small hits while maintaining the player's expectation for the ream. In this modification, the effect determining means 303 is an exceptional effect in which a symbol variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in a normal state is associated with an effect pattern (variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern) during the short time. The pattern table is stored, and the production pattern is determined with reference to the exceptional production pattern table.

  The present invention has been described based on the second embodiment. The second embodiment is an exemplification, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

  A first modification will be described. The first modification mainly shows a configuration for continuing the firing even after winning the V for feature 3 and feature 4 of the second embodiment. The effect determining means 303 displays a mission effect such as “Put into the attacker (big prize opening 20) to save the gauge!” Instead of the count effect by the treasure box object during the small hit game. Also good. As an example of this effect, an empty indicator display (or an indicator with different initial amount depending on the degree of chance) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60 in accordance with the occurrence of the small hit game. An example of performing an effect of expanding the area of the expectation suggestion display in the indicator display (an effect of accumulating gauges) with the entry into the winning opening 20 is given.

  Further, the effect determining means 303 displays an image indicating the expectation degree of the result of the suggestion effect between the first round and the second round of the small hit development jackpot in this mission effect, in the same manner as the display of the expectation degree image of the feature 2. Depending on the degree of achievement of the mission (in the above example, the degree of accumulation of the gauge), the mode of the image indicating the expected degree of profit obtained by the small hit development jackpot may be changed. In addition, the display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, but may be a decrease mode, or it continuously changes like an indicator as an effect of prompting the continuation of the launch by connecting to the expectation degree suggestion. Rather, it is displayed whether or not the item is displayed when the treasure box is opened according to the entry, such as “Chance for item XX, great chance if you can acquire all three items” Thus, the degree of expectation may be suggested based on the number and combination of suggested objects finally displayed.

  The effect determining means 303 is put on hold whenever a predetermined unit amount (one or two balls, etc.) of game balls enters the big prize opening 20 or whenever the mission effect gauge increases by a unit amount. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to display an effect that suggests or reports the number of small hits (a small hit announcement effect of feature 5). When the lottery is won, if there is an unreported small hit within the hold, the effect determination means 303 may display a small hit notice effect that suggests or notifies the small hit.

  In addition, when there is a small hit within the hold, the effect determining means 303 has a predetermined probability (for example, 2%) in the vicinity of the big winning opening 20 according to the ball entering the big winning opening 20 after the V winning. The light guide plate installed in the light source may be turned on. When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determining means 303 is a special effect that suggests that the small hit development jackpot ream is confirmed as the suggestion effect between the first and second rounds of the small hit development jackpot (described above). VV bonus) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

  A second modification will be described. The second modified example also mainly shows a configuration for continuing the firing even after winning the V for feature 3 and feature 4 of the second embodiment. The effect deciding means 303 includes an image of the winning prize opening image and the character image showing the winning prize opening 20 at the start of the small hit game, and an effect of urging the aiming at the winning prize opening 20 (referred to as “launch promotion effect”). .) May be displayed. When the V is won in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays the V notification image as shown in FIG. 38, but continues to display the firing promotion effect for a while after the V notification image is displayed. Also good. That is, the V notification image and the launch promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

  The timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is the earlier of when a certain time has elapsed after winning the V prize and when the closing condition of the big prize opening in the small hit game is established (10 balls entered or 15 times opened) It may be. Alternatively, the timing for terminating the display of the launch promotion effect is when there is a V prize and when three or more balls are entered into the grand prize opening 20, at the time of the V prize after entering three or more balls into the big prize opening 20 (+ several seconds later) Good).

  It should be noted that the effect determination means 303 displays the number-of-balls display object (such as the number-of-balls notification image 566 in FIG. 38) and the image of the promotion promotion effect from the V notification image 568 during the small hit game. Also, the display priority may be increased. For example, the effect determining unit 303 draws the number-of-balls notification image 566 and the image of the promotion promotion effect on a relatively upper drawing layer among a plurality of drawing layers provided in the effect display device 60, You may arrange | position so that it may not be hidden with another image. In addition, when the display priority of the V notification image 568 is increased, the effect determining unit 303 sets the number-of-balls notification image 566 and the launch at a position different from the V notification image 568 so as not to overlap the V notification image 568. An image of a promotion effect may be arranged. Further, the effect determination means 303 may make the size of the number-of-entry notification image 566 and the image of the promotion promotion effect smaller than the case where the V notification image 568 is not displayed so that it does not overlap with the V notification image 568.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, an example of effect applicable to the second embodiment and the modification will be described. FIG. 40 (a) shows a fluctuating effect screen 570 for notifying the occurrence of a small hit (or big hit), and shows a state in which the fluctuation of the decorative design 61 has stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (or big hit). Yes. In addition, on the variation effect screen 570 in FIG. 40A, the character image 572 is displayed in a manner that suggests or notifies a small hit (or big hit).

  FIG. 40 (b) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (a). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40B is displayed as a small hit game start demonstration, for example. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40B includes a right-handed instruction image 562 for instructing the player to make a right-handed game, a big-winning mouth image 574 simulating the appearance of the big-winning mouth 20, and a character image 572. . In the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40 (b), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode that prompts a right strike (for example, a state in which the user points to the right).

  FIG. 40 (c) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (b). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40 (c) is displayed, for example, after a V prize is generated in the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40C prompts the player to aim at the V notification image 568 for notifying the V winning, the round image 564 indicating the first round, and the attacker (large winning opening 20). A message 576 and a gauge image 578 indicating the number of balls entered into the special winning opening 20 are included. The gauge image 578 corresponds to the number-of-balls notification image 566 of the second embodiment, and the color changes according to the number of balls entered into the big winning opening 20, for example.

  FIG. 41 (a) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (c). In the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 41 (a), since the number of balls entered into the big prize opening 20 during the small hit game has reached a predetermined number or more (for example, seven balls or more), the aim is to aim at the big prize opening 20 A message 576 for prompting the user to perform the game and a winning prize opening image 574 are not displayed.

  FIG. 41 (b) shows an inter-round effect screen 580 following FIG. 41 (a). The inter-round effect screen 580 displays an inter-round effect that is displayed from the end of the small hit game (first round) to the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The inter-round effect corresponds to the suggestive effect of feature 4 of the second embodiment. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes a button image 584 that prompts the operation of the effect button 109 and the like, and a bonus suggestion image 582 that suggests the type of the big hit this time from a plurality of types of big hits that differ in the number of rounds and the number of time reductions. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image simulating a roulette that rotates in response to an operation of the effect button 109 or the like. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes an effect image 586 at the screen end. The effect image 586 may change in color with time, and may change to the same color as the gauge image 578 on the small hit game effect screen 560 at the end of the inter-round effect.

  FIG. 41 (c) shows a big hit effect screen 588 following FIG. 41 (b). The big hit effect screen 588 of FIG. 41 (c) shows the effect of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As described above, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564, acquired prize ball information 590, and a V stock image 592. A V stock image 592 in FIG. 41 (c) shows that two small hits are stocked (that is, two small hits exist in the hold).

  A third modification will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the condition for ending time reduction is as follows: (1) Number of fluctuations A (for example, 7 times) in FIG. 1 (2) Number of fluctuations B (for example, 100 times, 9 times, or 1 time) in FIG. 3) Including the number of fluctuations C (for example, 100 times, 15 times, or 7 times (A + B-1)) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. As already described in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern determination unit 231 and the second variation pattern determination unit 232 switch the variation pattern table according to the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively.

Processing related to short-time end 1:
The first variation pattern determination means 231 according to the present modification switches the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the time-short end timing. The number of variation pattern candidates (number of candidates that can be selected) defined in the variation pattern table for short time in FIG. 1 is small. Therefore, by forcibly switching the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time reduction, the effect determined in accordance with the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold will be monotonous during a plurality of variations after the completion of the time reduction. Can be avoided.

Processing for short-time end 2:
On the other hand, the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the present modification refers to the variation pattern table (mode 7 table in FIG. 29) different from the normal one after the time reduction ends, even if the time reduction ends. The variation pattern of special figure 2 is determined. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the time reduction effect mode (the rush effect of FIG. 26) continues while the suspension of the special figure 2 is consumed after the completion of the time reduction. However, when the special figure 2 hold occurs, it is necessary to select a variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction effect mode.

Processing for short-time end 3:
In the case where there is no V-winning (puncture) in the small hit game that is an exceptional short-time end, the first variation pattern determination means 231 switches the variation pattern table of FIG. 1 to the mode 0 table of FIG. The second variation pattern determining means 232 also switches the variation pattern table of FIG. 2 to the mode 0 table of FIG.

  In the above process 3, the small hits are not generated in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or the small hits may be generated in the special figure 1, and the small hit game of the special figure 1 is performed. In the same manner as in FIG. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, but when the opening / closing control of the specific area switching device 552 is performed so as not to win a V in the small hit game of the special figure 1 (the small hit in the special figure 1) If the game is designed to puncture almost certainly in the previous step), the small hit game shown in FIG. That is, in the small hit game shown in FIG. In order to avoid the shortage due to the puncture of the small hit game when the small hit is caused by the fluctuation of the special figure 1 before the special figure 2 hold occurs at the time of the first hit (at the time of the first time short transition) It is.

  A fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modification, a modification regarding the round indicator lamp will be described. As described in the base technology, the game state display unit 76 functions as a round indicator lamp that displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) executed in the special game by the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) is a gaming state display section 76 (that is, a round indicator light) for both the 10-round symbol jackpot and the 10-round jackpot development jackpot (1R for the jackpot and 9R for the jackpot). May be made to emit light in the same pattern. Similarly, the main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has the same pattern for the game state display unit 76 for both the 4 round symbol big hits and the 4 round small hit big hits (1R for small hits, 3R for big hits). You may make it light-emit.

  In addition, the main board 200 starts the special gaming state based on the action of the winning action continuous action device after the V winning or the bonus winning in the 10 rounds of the small hit development big hit and the 4 rounds of the small hit development big hit (small hit development). Until the start of the big hit), the game state display unit 76 may emit light in a common pattern for the small hit game. Then, after winning the V prize, the game state display unit 76 may be caused to emit light in the same pattern as the 10 round symbol jackpot and the same pattern as the 4 round symbol jackpot. This makes it impossible or difficult to identify 10 rounds or 4 rounds before winning the V prize.

  A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modification, a modification regarding the performance display unit 159 will be described. As described in the base technology, the performance display unit 159 calculates and displays the ratio (referred to as a base value) of the total number of winning balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls. In this modification, the base value in the normal game in the normal state (low-probability game state and non-short-time game state) is displayed, and in the normal game during the short-time game, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device During the special game, it is not handled as count data for display on the performance display section.

  In the gaming machine described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the small hit game corresponding to the substantial first round of the small hit development jackpot starts, the short-time game is ended, and the small hit game ends. Along with this, it is configured to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means that it is in the same state as the normal game in the normal state (low probability game state and non-temporal short game state), a state corresponding to the substantial first round in the small hit development big hit Nevertheless, the acquired game ball will be counted as a base value during normal game in the normal state. Under such circumstances, when the base value of the fifth modified example is calculated, a safe ball equivalent to 1 R for the big hit each time the small hit development big hit becomes the small hit V (second embodiment) 120 balls) is added to the base value, so in the small hit game that should be treated as a special game in the game, the count data of the performance display unit 159 will be included in the count data of the performance display unit 159. There is a fear that it will be.

  Therefore, as a fifth modification, an optimum method as a data counting method of the performance display unit 159 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment employing the small hit development big hit is described below.

  Regarding the data displayed on the performance display unit 159 of the fifth modified example, the main CPU 290, when executing the small hit game that becomes the small hit development big hit, because the execution of the big hit game becomes definite when winning V, The base value is calculated based on the total number of prize balls generated by entering the big prize opening 20 after the V prize, and the safe balls and out balls after the V prize are regarded as equivalent to the jackpot after the V prize. Adopt a control method to control outside. As a method for satisfying the gaming state equivalent to the big hit after winning the V, based on the fact that the V winning is made during the small hit game, the flag relating to the operation of the condition device or the continuous action actuating device becomes equivalent to that during the big win. Switching to a value.

  By doing so, for example, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, when the game ball that entered the third ball passes the specific area (V winning), from the fourth game ball, It can be regarded as a prize ball generated at the small hit development jackpot, and only “36 balls” (the number of prize balls 12 × the number of entered balls 3) as the number of prize balls generated at the normal game in the normal state is added as a count target. Therefore, in a gaming machine that adopts a small hit development jackpot, the base for normal games in the normal state is excessively raised based on the fact that a small hit game corresponding to the first round occurs. Can be prevented.

  A sixth modification will be described. In each example, the number of rounds per jackpot development jackpot and the number of short-time continuations after the end of jackpot development jackpot were determined according to the jackpot design. As a modified example, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of time reductions may be determined according to the result of a lottery at the time of winning a V prize (which may involve a small winning symbol) instead of the small winning symbol.

  The “random number” referred to in this specification or claims does not have to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, but a hardware random number or random number generation using a 16-bit counter. It may be a pseudo-random number such as a software random number using an algorithm. Alternatively, a combination of hardware random numbers and software random numbers, for example, a plus random number method in which the initial value is changed every time the counter makes one round may be used.

  In the present specification or claims, when “table” or “standard (selection standard)” is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option strictly. Not only indicates data defined by a table structure, but also includes a case where such correspondence is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. Including these, the term “reference (selection criterion)” is appropriately referred to as a concept substantially synonymous with “table”. In addition, when a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is substantially one type may be configured by a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. Indicates the number of substantive types of tables, not the number of subdivided tables.

  In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine in which a game ball (prize ball) is paid out as a profit based on the entry has been exemplified. However, instead of paying out a prize ball, an electronic profit management system is used to launch the game ball. -It can also be applied to so-called encapsulated type pachinko machines that manage prize balls. Such encapsulated type pachinko machines typically allow a predetermined number of game balls to circulate in the game machine, play the game balls that circulate, and launch game balls instead of paying out prize balls. Profit the player by increasing the number of times. For example, a ball circulation means that accepts a game ball that rolls in the game area and circulates it inside the game machine by sending it out to the game area again without discharging it to the game machine, , And a ball number managing means for managing the number of possessed balls based on the number of payout prize balls, and a ball displaying means for displaying the number of managed possessed balls.

  Any combination of the above-described embodiments and modifications is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. The new embodiment resulting from the combination has the effects of the combined example and modification. Further, it should be understood by those skilled in the art that the functions to be fulfilled by the constituent elements described in the claims are realized by the individual constituent elements shown in the embodiments and the modified examples or by their cooperation.

The techniques described in the first embodiment and the modification described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means is operated for a predetermined time that is set to be equal to or longer than a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired. A ball game machine that opens the ball change mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy-to-enter state is terminated when one symbol change triggered by entering the second starting port ends,
One symbol variation time triggered by entering the second starting port in the easy entry state is that at least two hits of the normal symbol occur when the operation lottery is continuously executed. The bullet ball game machine according to the aspect 1-1, wherein the ball game machine is defined more than a possible time.

[Aspect 1-2]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means is operated for a predetermined time that is set to be equal to or longer than a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired. Release the ball change mechanism,
The operation control means has a predetermined value when the opening time of the ball changing mechanism has reached the predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the holding number of the second lottery value. A ball game machine that terminates the opening of the ball changing mechanism when the number reaches the number.

[Aspect 1-3]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Production control means for displaying content of production on a predetermined production display device;
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means is operated for a predetermined time that is set to be equal to or longer than a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired. Release the ball change mechanism,
In the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means is configured to prompt the game ball to be aimed at the second starting port when the ball changing mechanism is released with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol. A special effect is displayed, and during the display of the special effect, the variation effect of the decorative design indicating the result of the determination of success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening is reduced and displayed.
In the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, the variation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the success / failure determination based on the entry into the first starting port is fixed to a time shorter than the average variation time in the normal game in the normal state. ,
The effect control means displays the special effect in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and changes the decorative pattern indicating the result of the determination of success / failure based on the entrance to the first start port during the display of the special effect. A ball game machine that hides the production.

[Aspect 1-4]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Production control means for displaying content of production on a predetermined production display device;
With
The easy-to-enter state is terminated when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are triggered by entering the second starting port.
The effect control means is a ball game machine that displays a special effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the second starting opening during the final symbol change in the easy-to-enter state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Production control means for displaying content of production on a predetermined production display device;
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means is operated for a predetermined time that is set to be equal to or longer than a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired. Release the ball change mechanism,
In the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means is configured to prompt the game ball to be aimed at the second starting port when the ball changing mechanism is released with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol. Display special effects,
The production control means is configured such that the change in the special symbol based on the entry into the first start port or the change in the special symbol based on the entry into the second start port is a predetermined standby demonstration transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The hold control means displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, with a predetermined number as the upper limit for the normal drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired upon entering the operation port. Hold until start,
The waiting demo transition time is a ball game machine that is set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the ordinary drawing lottery value is held to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Production control means for displaying content of production on a predetermined production display device;
With
In the normal game in the normal state, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit, the operation control means is operated for a predetermined time that is set to be equal to or longer than a time interval at which a plurality of game balls are fired. Release the ball change mechanism,
In the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means is configured to prompt the game ball to be aimed at the second starting port when the ball changing mechanism is released with the predetermined hit of the normal symbol. Display special effects,
The effect control means is configured such that a game ball entering one of a plurality of winning holes or entrances provided in the game area has not been detected for a predetermined waiting demo transition time, and the special symbol is If not changing, display a predetermined standby demonstration on the effect display device,
The hold control means displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, with a predetermined number as the upper limit for the normal drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired upon entering the operation port. Hold until start,
The waiting demo transition time is a ball game machine that is set longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the ordinary drawing lottery value is held to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism that can be opened so that a game ball can be entered from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
Special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means that is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and executes a special game with the opening of the big prize opening,
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to activate the ball changing mechanism, triggered by a ball entering the operating port;
A normal symbol display control means for variably displaying a normal symbol for indicating the result of the operation lottery;
When the result of the operation lottery is a win and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a win, an operation control means for opening the entrance variation mechanism;
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the second starting port by increasing the probability of winning in the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Specific game control means for transitioning the game state of the normal game to the easy-to-enter game state after the special game is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Production control means for displaying content of production on a predetermined production display device;
With
The easy-to-enter state is terminated when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations are triggered by entering the second starting port.
The effect control means ends with a change resulting in an end trigger of the easy entry state or a change based on the second lottery value remaining in the hold control means after the easy entry state ends. In the case, the effect display device up to that point is displayed on the effect display device,
When the special symbol indicating the result of the determination of success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening is fluctuating, the effect control unit is configured to display an effect related to the ball in a manner having higher visibility than the fluctuating effect. Ball game machine.

The techniques described in the second embodiment and the modification described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
Opening / closing control means for controlling opening / closing of the special prize opening;
With
The big prize opening includes an opening / closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the big prize opening, and when the big prize opening is in a closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member,
Both the unit game in the special game and the small hit game are ended when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number,
The opening time of the big prize opening in the small hit game is set to a short time during which a game ball rolling on the opening and closing member can enter the big prize opening,
The opening / closing control means is a bullet ball game machine capable of repeatedly opening the large winning opening for a short time in the small hit game.
According to this configuration, by using a common winning a prize opening for jackpots and jackpots on a machine with a jackpot development jackpot, it is possible to secure a wide board area where the stage can be performed, and enhance the interest of the stage. it can. In addition, in the small hit game, it becomes possible to obtain a prize ball equivalent to one round in the big hit, and it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient ball feeling.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays an image corresponding to the predetermined number during the small hit game and changes the image according to a ball entering the big winning opening during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, it is suggested to the player that a relatively large number of balls can be entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game (in other words, the possibility of winning a ball) in the small hit development big hit machine. The player can be prompted to launch during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
When the game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, after the small hit game is over, according to the type of symbol indicating the small hit, Display one of several types of suggestion effects that suggest the benefits that the player can earn,
The effect determining means displays an image showing an expectation degree that a high profit is suggested in a later suggestion effect during the small hit game, and in accordance with a ball entering the big winning opening during the small hit game A ball game machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, the player with a small hit development jackpot can identify the expectation that a high profit is suggested by a later suggestion effect by entering the big prize opening during the small hit game. It is possible to encourage launching during small hit games.

[Aspect 2-3]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game involving the operation of a special electric accessory and the opening of the big prize opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and that includes the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
When the game ball that has entered the big prize opening passes the specific area during the small hit game, the effect determination means displays an effect to notify that, and from the small hit game to the special game An image showing the cumulative number of times that the special electric accessory has been activated is displayed,
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays an image indicating the first operation of the special electric accessory as the image during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, even during the small hit game, an image indicating “the first round” or the like is displayed, that is, a series of count displays from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to acquire a ball equivalent to one round of special games in the small hit game, and the player can be prompted to launch during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-4]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the big winning opening which is a condition for ending a unit game in the special game,
Types of profits that a player can obtain regarding a special game executed when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the special game ends At least one of the types of benefits that a player can earn in relation to a game depends on the type of symbol that represents a small hit,
When the game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the production determining means, after the final opening of the big prize opening in the small hit game ends, A bullet ball game machine that displays an effect suggesting a type of profit that a player can acquire according to the type of symbol indicating a small hit before the first opening of the special winning opening in the special game.
According to this configuration, on the condition that the game ball has passed the specific area, the game ball is displayed in the small hit game by displaying an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can acquire according to the small hit symbol. When the content does not pass through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the production content and the actual profit type from becoming inconsistent. In addition, in small hit games, vibration detection may be performed to prevent fraud, but according to the above configuration, in order to perform a suggestion effect by removing the timing of vibration detection, vibration such as an effect that causes the player to press a button, etc. It is also possible to provide a suggestive effect of the resulting mode.

[Aspect 2-5]
A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
When there is a ball entering the second starting port, regardless of whether the change display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the ball as a trigger is started immediately, the ball is acquired as a trigger When the result of winning / failing determination based on the drawn lottery value is a small hit, prior determination information indicating that a small hit can be made in the variation corresponding to the pitch is available in advance A determination means;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect determining means is a case where a game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the prior determination information indicates that the lottery value for the small hit is 1 A ball ball game machine capable of executing an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit at least once before the special game is ended and the normal game is started when two or more are held.
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that a small hit development jackpot can be additionally acquired in the machine with a jackpot development jackpot. Yes, it can further enhance the fun of the game.

  11 First start port, 12 Second start port, 221 First hit / fail judgment means, 222 Second hit / fail judgment means, 240 Hold control means, 260 Special game control means, 265 Small hit game control means, 270 Specific game control means, 303 effect determining means, 304 effect control means, 500 pachinko gaming machine.

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed;
A first start port provided at a predetermined position in the game area;
A second start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball change mechanism that is displaceable so that a game ball can be changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state;
NG determination means for performing NG determination based on the first lottery value acquired with the entry to the first start opening or the second lottery value acquired with the entry to the second start opening When,
A symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure;
A hold control means for holding the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number up to the start of variable display of symbols corresponding to the determination of success / failure;
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, is opened according to the result of the success / failure determination, and the entry of the gaming ball is an opportunity for giving a profit to the player;
A small hit game control means for executing a small hit game with the opening of the big winning opening when the symbol indicating that the result of the determination of success / failure is a small hit is displayed;
When the symbol indicating that the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit is stopped or displayed, or a game ball that has entered the big prize opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided in the game. If so, special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games that are in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and that includes the opening of the big prize opening,
An effect display device for displaying the effect;
Effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device;
When there is a ball entering the second starting port, regardless of whether the change display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the ball as a trigger is started immediately, the ball is acquired as a trigger When the result of winning / failing determination based on the drawn lottery value is a small hit, prior determination information indicating that a small hit can be made in the variation corresponding to the pitch is available in advance A determination means;
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined time has elapsed,
The effect determining means is a case where a game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the prior determination information indicates that the lottery value for the small hit is 1 A ball ball game machine capable of executing an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit at least once before the special game is ended and the normal game is started when two or more are held.

Images